Acura 2010 Rl Users Manual Owner's (Linked)

Acura-2010-Rl-Owners-Manual-761947 acura-2010-rl-owners-manual-761947

Manual JA1010OM 2010 Acura RL Owners Manual | Manual Device

2015-02-02

: Acura Acura-2010-Rl-Users-Manual-412901 acura-2010-rl-users-manual-412901 acura pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 551

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

０９／０４／０２ １８：３６：５５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０００２

Introduction
Congratulations on your selection of the 2010 Acura RL. We are certain you
will be pleased with your purchase of one of the finest luxury vehicles in the
world.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.

As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３７：００ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０００３

Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３７：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０００４

A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
and one of
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.

iii

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３７：２３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０００６

2010 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual

Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 4
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 7
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ........ 59
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink , and other convenience items)............... 203
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 377
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 395
Maintenance (minders, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage) ................................................ 437
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, fuses) ............................................... 487
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) .............................................. 515
Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ........................ 531
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 535
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures)

1
00X31-SJA-6500
© 2009 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３７：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０００７

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３７：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０００８

Overview of Contents
Contents
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Instruments and Controls
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
Features
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, and other
convenience features.

Before Driving
What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Driving
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
Maintenance
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.

Technical Information
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
Warranty and Client Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Index
Service Information Summary
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３７：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０００９

Your Vehicle at a Glance

DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
(P.163)

DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG (P.11, 26)

INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.62)

CEILING
CONSOLE＊1

MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON
(P.161)
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG
(P.11, 26)

POWER DOOR
LOCK MASTER
SWITCH
(P.153)

CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.204)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.185)

AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.213)
INTERFACE DIAL
(P.205, 213, 282)
COMPASS SYSTEM＊2
(P.281)

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
(P.154)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE BUTTON
(P.379)
＊1:
HOMELINK BUTTONS (P.334)
MOONROOF SWITCH (P.188)
POWER REAR
SUNSHADE BUTTON (P.198)
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT
TILT BUTTON (P.158)

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.399)
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKETS
(P.197)
HOOD RELEASE LEVER
(P.381)

REAR SEAT HEATER USB ADAPTER CABLE
SWITCHES＊3 (P.184) (P.259)

＊2 : RL models
＊3 : Canadian models only

2010 RL

AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK (P.277)

０９／０４／０２ １８：３８：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００１０

Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT
PANEL BRIGHTNESS
(P.146)

HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS
(P.140, 142)
COLLISION MITIGATION
BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS)
OFF SWITCH＊2
(P.416)

WINDSHIELD
WIPER/WASHER
(P.137)

HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.146)

REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
(P.147)/
HEATED MIRROR
BUTTON (P.162)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.316)/
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (ACC)
BUTTONS＊2 (P.319, 324)
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS (P.71)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.430)
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH＊2
(P.145)
HEADLIGHT WASHER
SWITCH＊3 (P.138)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.161)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS (P.148)

＊1
＊2
＊3
＊4

:
:
:
:

PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.35)

BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK
BUTTONS (P.354)
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO
CONTROLS (P.278)

HORN＊1

DISTANCE
BUTTON＊2
(P.328, 333)

FRONT SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES (P.181)/
FRONT SEAT HEATER
AND SEAT
VENTILATION
BUTTONS＊2 (P.182)

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS＊4
(P.304)

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
Canadian models only
Refer to the navigation system manual.

2010 RL

Your Vehicle at a Glance

PADDLE SHIFTERS
(P.403)

０９／０４／０２ １８：３８：０３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００１１

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３８：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００１２

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions .......... 8
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 9
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 15
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 16
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 16
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts ...................................... 17
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 19
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Additional Information About
Your Seat Belts ........................ 21
Seat Belt System Components ... 21

Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 22
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 23
Seat Belt e-pretensioners ............ 24
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 25
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 26
Airbag System Components ....... 26
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 29
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32
How Your Side Curtain
Airbags Work ........................... 34
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 35
How the Passenger Airbag
Off Indicator Works ................ 35
Airbag Service .............................. 36
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 38
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 38
All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 39

The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 39
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 41
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 41
Additional Safety Precautions .... 41
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 43
Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Protecting Small Children .......... 44
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
With LATCH ................................ 47
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 49
With a Tether ............................... 51
Protecting Larger Children ............ 52
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 52
Using a Booster Seat ................... 53
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 54
Additional Safety Precautions .... 55
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56
Safety Labels .................................... 57

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.

０９／０４／０２ １８：３８：１７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００１３

Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 17 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 38 − 55 ).

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current

2010 RL

conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 439 ).
Pay Appropriate Attention to the
Task of Driving Safely
Engaging in mobile phone
conversation or other activities that
keep you from paying close attention
to the road, other vehicles and
pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change
quickly, and only you can decide
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.

０９／０４／０２ １８：３８：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００１４

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

(8)

(9) (3)

(4)
(6) (9)

(1)
(7)

(6)

(5)

(2)
＊ : On model with Collision Mitigation
Brake System (CMBS)

(7)

(8)
(11)

(2)

(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/
Seat Belt e-pretensioners＊

Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
the correct position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

(10)

Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.

０９／０４／０２ １８：３８：３６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００１５

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts

Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including:
− frontal impacts
− side impacts
− rear impacts
− rollovers

2010 RL

Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What You Should Do:

Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.

０９／０４／０２ １８：３８：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００１６

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
29 for more information on how
your front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 32 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).

In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact (see page
34 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).

CONTINUED

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３８：５１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００１７

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.

They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.

What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.

2010 RL

The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.

０９／０４／０２ １８：３８：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００１８

Protecting Adults and Teens
Your vehicle has a door and trunk
open indicators on the multiinformation display to indicate when
a specific door or the trunk is not
tightly closed. You will see the
appropriate indicator(s) and the
message for each condition.

See pages 38 − 55 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.

You will also hear a beep when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and each time you open
any door or the trunk with the key in
the ON (II) position.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult
passengers, and teenage children
who are large enough and mature
enough to drive or ride in the front.

When one or more doors are not
tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’
indicator will come on.

1. Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are
closed and locked.
Your vehicle has a programmable
auto door locking/unlocking feature.
For more information, see page 123 .

CONTINUED

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３９：０５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００１９

Protecting Adults and Teens
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
When the trunk is not tightly closed,
the ‘‘TRUNK OPEN’’ indicator will
come on.

When one or more doors and the
trunk lid are not tightly closed, the
corresponding indicator for each
condition and the ‘‘DOOR & TRUNK
OPEN’’ indicator will come on.

2010 RL

See page 153 for how to lock the
doors.

０９／０４／０２ １８：３９：１２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００２０

Protecting Adults and Teens
2.Adjust the Front Seats

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 148 ).

Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.

Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
See page 156 for how to adjust the
front seats.

If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３９：２１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００２１

Protecting Adults and Teens
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page 156 for how to adjust the
seat-backs.

2010 RL

Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers with adjustable
head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.

０９／０４／０２ １８：３９：２９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００２２

Protecting Adults and Teens

Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.

Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.

See page 157 for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.

If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.

5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.

０９／０４／０２ １８：３９：３７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００２３

Protecting Adults and Teens
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

RELEASE
BUTTON

Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause

very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.

Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.

No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat

Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).

2010 RL

belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 21 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.

０９／０４／０２ １８：３９：４４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００２４

Protecting Adults and Teens

Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Driver and Passenger Safety

6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
engine is off.

Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.

If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.

CONTINUED

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：３９：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００２５

Protecting Adults and Teens
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.

Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve

Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on

occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.

the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.

Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp

Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a

Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.

objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.

Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your

hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.

2010 RL

side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing

or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４０：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００２６

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages 31 and 32 ).

The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.

If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.

This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 79 ).

If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.

When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.

CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners and, on models with
collision mitigation brake system
(CMBS), seat belt e-pretensioners.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４０：０８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００２７

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.

Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 17 for how to
properly position the belt).

Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2010 RL

To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４０：１６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００２８

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.

The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
If a side curtain airbag deploys
during a side impact, the tensioner
on that side of the vehicle will also
deploy.

For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.

The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
extra tension in the seat belt could
be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page 49 ).

０９／０４／０２ １８：４０：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００２９

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt e-pretensioners

On models with Collision Mitigation
Brake System

For added safety, the front seat belts
are equipped with e-pretensioners
that work in combination with the
collision mitigation brake system
(CMBS) (see page 413 ) and the
brake pedal assist function (see page
410 ).

If your vehicle gets too close to the
vehicle ahead of it in your lane, the
driver’s e-pretensioner slightly
retracts the seat belt to alert the
driver of the approaching vehicle. If
a collision with the vehicle in front of
you is likely, the e-pretensioners on
both front seats retract the seat belts
with enough force to properly
restrain you and your front
passenger. After they activate, the
e-pretensioners release the retracted
seat belts.

The e-pretensioners do not activate
when the seat belts are not worn or
when the vehicle stability assist
(VSA) off indicator on the
instrument panel is on.

To get the full benefit of the
e-pretensioners, you and your front
passenger must sit normally in your
seats and wear your seat belts
properly (see page 17 ).

In addition, the front passenger’s
e-pretensioner does not activate
when the passenger’s airbag is
automatically turned off because the
weight sensor detects a child in the
front passenger’s seat.

2010 RL

If the automatic seat belt tensioners
are activated by a collision, both
front seat belts and all related
components must be
replaced (see page 25 ). If only the
e-pretensioners were activated, no
components need to be replaced.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４０：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００３０

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.

The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.

Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
470 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.

Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.

Acura provides a limited warranty on
seat belts. See your Acura Warranty
Information booklet for details.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４０：３６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００３１

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components

(1)

(8)

(2)

(10)

(5)

(1) Driver’s Airbag
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3)
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/
Seat Belt e-pretensioners＊
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(5)
(7) Front Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors
(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(9) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(10) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Sensors

(9)
(7)
(9)

(6)
(4)

＊ : On models with CMBS

2010 RL

(4)

０９／０４／０２ １８：４０：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００３２

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:

(14)

Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 32 ).

(12)
(11)
(13)
(11) e-pretensioner Control Unit＊
(12) Front Impact Sensors
(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(14) Rear Safing Sensor
(15) Side Curtain Airbags

(15)

＊ : On models with CMBS

Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
34 ).
CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

(13)

Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 29 ).

０９／０４／０２ １８：４０：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００３３

Additional Information About Your Airbags
On models with CMBS, front seat
belt e-pretensioners (see page 24 ).
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 23 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 33 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page 21 ).

A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
31 ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 31 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.

2010 RL

An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, seat belt tensioners (see
page 34 ), or, on models with
CMBS, seat belt e-pretensioners
(see page 24 ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 35 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 35 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４１：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００３４

Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety

During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.

If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.

This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.

If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the driver’s and front passenger’s
airbags, at the time and with the
force needed.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 31 ).

After inflating, the front airbags will
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
CONTINUED

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４１：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００３５

Additional Information About Your Airbags
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.

Dual-Stage Airbags

Dual-Threshold Airbags

Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.

Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.

In a more severe crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a less severe crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.

2010 RL

If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４１：１７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００３６

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags

DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR

Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.

PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR

The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Acura does
not encourage carrying an infant or
small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of an infant or
small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29
kg), the system will automatically
turn the passenger’s front airbag off.
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off. CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children or small-statured adults who
ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:

０９／０４／０２ １８：４１：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００３７

Additional Information About Your Airbags
When the passenger airbag gets
turned off by the weight sensors, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 35 ).
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag is automatically turned off.
However, the passenger airbag off
indicator in this situation will not
come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.

This includes:

Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.

How Your Side Airbags Work

Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Back seat passengers should not
wedge objects or intentionally
force their feet under the front
passenger seat.
Also, make sure the floor mat behind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
471 ). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.

A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.

2010 RL

If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４１：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００３８

Additional Information About Your Airbags

To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.

Side Airbag Cutoff System

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Acura does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.

If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 35 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or another object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.

Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４１：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００３９

Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.

How the SRS Indicator
Works
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbags,
seat belt tensioners, and, on models
with CMBS, seat belt e-pretensioners.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.

In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４１：５５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００４０

Additional Information About Your Airbags

If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.

Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.

How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
U.S.

Canada

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
out (see page 63 ). If it does not
come on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, you will also see a
‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’
message on the multi-information
display. Have the system checked
(see page 79 ).

How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works

U.S.

Canada

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
79 ).

０９／０４／０２ １８：４２：０４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００４１

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.

2010 RL

Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４２：１０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００４２

Additional Information About Your Airbags
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an

If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your

airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.

Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and

seat belts provide the best
protection.

Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or

another liquid soaks into the seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.

Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause

the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the

driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Acura
Client Services at 800-382-2238.

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.

Additional Safety Precautions

０９／０４／０２ １８：４２：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００４３

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children age 12 and
under.

Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.

To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state,
Canadian province and territory
requires that infants and children be
properly restrained when they ride in
a vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 43 − 51 ).

2010 RL

Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 52 − 55 ).

０９／０４／０２ １８：４２：２８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００４４

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.

The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off under certain
circumstances (see page 35 ), please
follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If

the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.

Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is

too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,

larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page 52 for important
information about protecting larger
children).

CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４２：３９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００４５

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

Canadian Models
SUN VISORS

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４２：５０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００４６

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 52 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 156 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 19 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
17 ).

If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.

Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a

seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the

belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:

０９／０４／０２ １８：４２：５７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００４７

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent

children from accidentally falling
out (see page 155 ).
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without

adult supervision is illegal in most
states, Canadian provinces and
territories, and can be very
hazardous.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.

Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose

seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 49 and 50 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)

Lock all doors and the trunk when
your vehicle is not in use. Children

who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature (see page 155 ).
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young

children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４３：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００４８

Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants

Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed

facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.

If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.

Child Seat Type

An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.

It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.

Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４３：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００４９

Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Protecting Small Children

Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.

Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Child Seat Type

Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.

and weight are appropriate for a
rear-facing seat.

Many states, Canadian provinces and
territories allow a child one year of
age or older who also meets the
minimum size and weight
requirements to transition from a
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４３：２２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００５０

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too

far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 31 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.

If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.

Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) system.

Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.

Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.

If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.

Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.

０９／０４／０３ １６：１３：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００５１

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1. The child seat should meet
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS
213 on the box.
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.

Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.

Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.

Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be

secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child

seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

2010 RL

movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.

Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４３：４１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００５２

Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) at the outer
rear seats.

The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
You can find lower anchors in the
slits in the seat-backs.

LOWER
ANCHORS

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON

To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:

3. Push the rear head restraint tilt
button on the ceiling console to
pivot the head restraints down.

1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.

BUTTON

０９／０４／０２ １８：４３：５０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００５３

Installing a Child Seat
TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR
RIGID TYPE

4. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.

FLEXIBLE TYPE

Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
5. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.

6. Route the tether strap over the
head restraint, then attach the
tether strap hook to the anchor,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
7. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
8. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４３：５８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００５４

Installing a Child Seat

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt.

2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４４：０４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００５５

Installing a Child Seat
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.

4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.

5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.

To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４４：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００５６

Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
TETHER STRAP HOOK

3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.

COVER
ANCHOR

A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.

ANCHOR

1. After properly securing the child
seat with the lap/shoulder belt
(see page 22 ), pivot the head
restraint down (see page 157 ) and
route the tether strap over the
head restraint.

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach
the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４４：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００５７

Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear the lap/
shoulder belt.

Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.

The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.

If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４４：２７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００５８

Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?

Using a Booster Seat

5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?

If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend

A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.

2010 RL

Driver and Passenger Safety

Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
45 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?

If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.

to drive.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４４：３８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００５９

Protecting Larger Children
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.

Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size

Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 17 and 52 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity

A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.

To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.

2010 RL

If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４４：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００６０

Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result

Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could

improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety

in serious neck injuries during a
crash.

Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to

cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４４：５０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００６１

Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.

The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in a collision that
may have damaged the underside.

High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.

2010 RL

With the trunk open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows and
set the climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the climate
control system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４４：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００６２

Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

DASHBOARD
U.S. models only

Driver and Passenger Safety

If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.

RADIATOR CAP

CONTINUED

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４５：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００６３

Safety Labels
SUN VISORS
U.S. models

DOORJAMBS
Canadian models

U.S. models

2010 RL

Canadian models

０９／０４／０２ １８：４５：１６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００６４

Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.

Childproof Door Locks ................. 155
Seats ................................................ 156
Mirrors ............................................ 161
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 163
Keyless Access System................. 166
Front Seat Heaters ........................ 181
Front Seat Heaters and Seat
Ventilation .................................. 182
Rear Seat Heaters
(Canadian models) .................... 184
Power Windows ............................. 185
Moonroof ........................................ 188
Parking Brake ................................ 191
Interior Convenience Items .......... 192
Glove Box ................................... 193
Beverage Holders ...................... 194
Console Compartment .............. 195
Sun Visors ................................... 196
Vanity Mirror ............................. 196
Accessory Power Sockets......... 197
Front Door Pockets ................... 197
Power Rear Sunshade ............... 198
Integrated Sunshades ............... 199
Interior Lights ................................ 200

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

Control Locations ............................ 60
Instrument Panel ............................. 61

Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 62
Gauges .............................................. 70
Temperature Gauge .................... 70
Fuel Gauge ................................... 70
Multi-Information Display .............. 71
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel .......................................... 136
Windshield Wipers and
Washers ...................................... 137
Turn Signals and Headlights ........ 140
Fog Lights .................................. 142
Daytime Running Lights .......... 142
Automatic Lighting Off
Feature .................................... 143
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS) ........................................... 144
Hazard Warning Button ................ 146
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 146
Rear Window Defogger ................ 147
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 148
Keys and Locks.............................. 150
Immobilizer System....................... 151
Ignition Switch ............................... 152
Door Locks ..................................... 153
Trunk............................................... 154
Emergency Trunk Opener ....... 155

０９／０４／０２ １８：４５：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００６５

Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.62)
GAUGES (P.70)

CEILING CONSOLE＊1

DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
(P.163)

CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.204)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.213)

POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.153)

INTERFACE DIAL
(P.205, 213, 282)
COMPASS SYSTEM＊2
(P.281)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.185)

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.399)

TRUNK RELEASE
BUTTON (P.154)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE BUTTON
(P.379)
＊1 :
HOMELINK BUTTONS (P.334)
MOONROOF SWITCH (P.188)
POWER REAR
SUNSHADE BUTTON (P.198)
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT
HOOD RELEASE LEVER
TILT BUTTON (P.158)
(P.381)

MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON
(P.161)

ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKETS
(P.197)
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK (P.277)
REAR SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES＊3 (P.184)

＊2 : RL models
＊3 : Canadian models only

2010 RL

USB ADAPTER CABLE
(P.259)

０９／０４／０２ １８：４５：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００６６

Instrument Panel
KEYLESS ACCESS
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.68)

VSA
HIGH BEAM
ACTIVATION INDICATOR
(P.65)
INDICATOR
(P.429)

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR＊(P.65) /
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
INDICATOR＊ (P.66, 319)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
SYSTEM (ABS)
INDICATOR (P.64, 411)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR (P.35, 63)

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.64)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.65)
MESSAGE INDICATOR
(P.68)

ELECTRONICALLY
CONTROLLED
POWER STEERING
SYSTEM (ECPS)
INDICATOR (P.68)
PARKING BRAKE
AND BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.63, 502)

SECURITY SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.69)
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY (P.71)

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP (P.62, 501)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.62, 500)
SH-AWD INDICATOR (P.66)

COLLISION MITIGATION BRAKE
SYSTEM (CMBS) INDICATOR＊ (P.69)
LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.66)
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM
(AFS) INDICATOR＊(P.69, 144)

SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.21, 62)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS) INDICATOR (P.34, 63)

LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATOR (P.67, 423)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.64)

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
＊ : If equipped.

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.62, 500)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.65, 429)

０９／０４／０２ １８：４５：４５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００６７

Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passenger to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your belt, the beeper sounds and the
indicator flashes. If you do not fasten
your seat belt before the beeper
stops, the indicator stops flashing
but remains on.

If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page 21 .
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 79 ).

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running, or if a
‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’
message is on the multi-information
display. For more information, see
page 500 .
Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged, and you will also see
a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. For more information, see
page 500 .
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 501 .

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４５：５６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００６８

Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.

Canada

1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. Driving with
the parking brake not fully
released can damage the rear
brakes, axles, and tires.
If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 78 ).

U.S.

Canada

Side Airbag Off Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. You will also
see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG
OFF’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 79 ).
For more information, see page 35 .

Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system, side curtain
airbags, automatic seat belt
tensioners driver’s seat position
sensor, the front passenger’s weight
sensors, or, on models with ACC,
seat belt e-pretensioners. You will
also see a ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 79 ).
For more information, see page 34 .

2. If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, it can
indicate a problem in the brake

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:

system. You will also see a
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. For more information, see
page 508 .

０９／０４／０２ １８：４６：０５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００６９

Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. This indicator
will also come on when the light
switch is in AUTO and the lights
turn on automatically. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
then go off if you have a properlycoded remote. If it is not a properlycoded remote, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page 151 ).

If you use the remote, this indicator
blinks several times when you turn
the ignition switch from
ACCESSORY (I) to the LOCK (0)
position.
If you use the built-in key, this
indicator blinks several times when
you turn the ignition switch from ON
(II) to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If this indicator comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
the ABS. If this happens, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With this indicator on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function. You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS

2010 RL

SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 78 ).
For more information, see page 411 .
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the indicator does not
blink or blinks rapidly, it usually
means one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page 464 ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signals blink. All
turn signals on the outside of the
vehicle should flash.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４６：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００７０

Instrument Panel Indicators

If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 78 ).
Take your vehicle to a dealer to have
it checked. Without VSA, your
vehicle still has normal driving ability,
but will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. For more
information, see page 429 .

VSA Activation Indicator
This indicator has three functions:
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 429 ).
3. It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 78 ).

Fog Light Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page 142 .
High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 140 .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page 142 ).
Cruise Main Indicator

This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page 429 .

On models without adaptive cruise
control (ACC)

This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel (see page 316 ).

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４６：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００７１

Instrument Panel Indicators
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

On models with adaptive cruise control
(ACC)

This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
When you push the ACC button on
the steering wheel, this indicator
comes on green. You will also see
‘‘ACC’’ on the multi-information
display.
If the indicator comes on orange,
there is a problem with the ACC
system. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ACC SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
79 ). Take your vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked. For more
information, see page 319 .

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comes on as a reminder that you
must refuel soon. You will also see a
‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 79 ).
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 2.69 U.S. gal (10.2 ) of
fuel remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.

2010 RL

Super Handling-All
Wheel Drive (SH-AWD)
Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If this indicator comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
the SH-AWD system. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 78 ) .Take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
For more information, see page 407 .
If the indicator blinks while driving,
pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates the differential
temperature is too high.
You will also see a ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF
TEMP. HIGH’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
78 ).

０９／０４／０２ １８：４６：３９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００７２

Instrument Panel Indicators
Pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out.

Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator has two functions:

Check the tire pressure monitor on
the multi-information display and
determine the cause (see page 425 ).
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure on the multiinformation display, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
have the flat tire repaired as soon as
possible. If two or more tires are
underinflated, call a professional
towing service. For more
information, see page 513 .

2. If this indicator begins to flash,
there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS). You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see page
423 .

1. If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 79 ).

０９／０４／０２ １８：４６：４７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００７３

Instrument Panel Indicators
Electronically Controlled
Power Steering System
(ECPS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition to the ON
(II) position and goes off after the
engine starts. If it comes on at any
other time, there is a problem with
the power steering system. You will
also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER
STEERING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 78 ). If this happens, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, and turn off
the engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch this
indicator. If it does not go off or
comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the ECPS is turned off, which
could make the vehicle harder to
steer.

The indicator comes on when you
run the engine while the vehicle is
not moving. To turn the indicator off,
restart the engine.
Keyless Access System
Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, it indicates that there is a
problem with the system. You will
also see a ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
ACCESS SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
79 ). For more information, see page
179 .

2010 RL

Message Indicator
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multiinformation display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page 71 ) to see the message (see
page 78 ).
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４６：５８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００７４

Instrument Panel Indicators
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFS) Indicator

Security System Indicator

If equipped

It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the adaptive front
lighting system (AFS).
This indicator blinks when there is a
problem with the AFS system; you
will also see a ‘‘CHECK ADAPTIVE
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 78 ). If this
happens, stop the vehicle in a safe
place, turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, and restart the engine. If
the indicator does not go off or
blinks again, take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked. For more
information, see page 144 .

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. For more
information, see page 315 .
Collision Mitigation
Brake System (CMBS)
Indicator
If equipped

This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It also comes on as a

The CMBS indicator also comes on
if dirt or other debris blocks the
radar sensor in the front grille. You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK CMBS
RADAR SENSOR’’ message on the
multi-information display. When you
clean the radar sensor, the indicator
should go off the next time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, there is a problem with
the CMBS. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK CMBS SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display. If
this happens, take your vehicle to a
dealer, and have it checked. For
more information, see page 418 .
When this indicator is on, the CMBS
is not working.

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.

reminder that you have turned off
the collision mitigation brake system
(CMBS).

０９／０４／０２ １８：４７：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００７５

Gauges

TACHOMETER

SPEEDOMETER

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
or less than the actual amount.
The needle returns to the
bottom after you turn off the
ignition.

Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
U.S. model is shown.

Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the

FUEL GAUGE

upper end of the white section of the
gauge. If it reaches the red (hot)
mark, pull safely to the side of the
road. For more information, see page
497 .

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４７：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００７６

Multi-Information Display

When you open the driver’s door, a
‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on the
multi-information display. When you
turn the ignition switch from the ON
(II) position to the ACCESSORY (I)
position, a ‘‘Goodbye’’ message is
shown on the display.

INFO (▲/▼)
BUTTONS
U.S.

Instruments and Controls

The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably. Others help to keep
you aware of the periodic
maintenance your vehicle needs for
continued trouble-free driving.

CANADA

SEL RESET BUTTON

You can change the display and
customize your vehicle control
settings by pressing the SEL/RESET
or INFO buttons on the right side of
the steering wheel.
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the lower part of the
multi-information display changes as
shown in the illustration, each time
you press the SEL/RESET button.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４７：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００７７

Multi-Information Display
Odometer

When you reset Trip A, average fuel
economy A is reset at the same time.
When you reset Trip B, average fuel
economy B is reset.

Trip Meter

In the customizing mode, you can set
Trip A, average fuel economy A, and
average speed to reset at the same
time when you refuel your vehicle
(see page 99 ).
ODOMETER

The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.

TRIP METER

This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, then
press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４７：２８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００７８

Multi-Information Display
Outside Temperature
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

CANADA

This shows the outside Fahrenheit
temperature in U.S. models, and
Celsius temperature in Canadian
models.

Engine Oil Life

You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page 97 ) .

This shows the remaining life of the
engine oil. It shows 100% after the
engine oil is replaced and the display
is reset. The engine oil life is
calculated based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions. For more information,
see page 439 .

In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.

ENGINE OIL LIFE

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

U.S.

The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４７：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００７９

Multi-Information Display
Normal Display Messages
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the upper part of the
display changes, as shown in the
illustration, each time you press the
▼ button. If you press the ▲ button,
the display returns to the previous
message.

U.S.

Press the ▼ button
Press the ▲ button

2010 RL

CANADA

If ON

０９／０４／０２ １８：４７：５１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００８０

Multi-Information Display
Trip Computer
Along with the trip meter, the trip
computer calculates these values:

INST. MPG (U.S. models)/INST.
L/100km (Canadian models)
This shows your instant fuel
economy.
When you turn off the engine, INST.
MPG or INST. L/100 km is also
reset.
RANGE
This shows the estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy
you received over the last several
miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),

When the battery is disconnected, or
you refuel, RANGE is also reset.
ELAPSED TIME
This shows the accumulated
traveling time since you last reset it.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, ELAPSED
TIME is reset.
You can customize the ELAPSED
TIME reset conditions on the multiinformation display (see page 101 ).
AVERAGE SPEED
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.

You can customize the average
speed reset condition on the multiinformation display (see page 99 ).
AVERAGE FUEL A/B
This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or liter/100 km (Canadian models)
since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.
The average fuel economy will be
reset when you reset the trip meter,
or if the vehicle’s battery goes dead
or is disconnected.
You can customize the average fuel
A reset condition on the multiinformation display (see page 99 ).

When you reset Trip A, average
speed is also reset.

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

Instantaneous fuel mileage
Range
Elapsed Time
Average Vehicle Speed
Average Fuel Economy

so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４７：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００８１

Multi-Information Display
SH-AWD Torque Distribution
Monitor

Tire Pressure Monitor

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

U.S.

Canada

This monitor shows how much
torque is being delivered to each
wheel. For more information, see
page 407 .

When the tire pressure monitor is
shown on the multi-information
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown.
You can see the pressure of each tire
in this monitor. If one or more tires
are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page 423 .

2010 RL

You can receive or make phone calls
from your cell phone through your
vehicle’s Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(HFL) system without touching your
cell phone.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４８：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００８２

Multi-Information Display
Maintenance Messages

Have your dealer do the indicated
maintenance as soon as you see this
message, and have them reset the
display after completing the service.
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance or do not reset the
display, the message changes to
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when the
engine oil life becomes 0%.

When the engine oil life reaches 15%,
the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ and the code for the
maintenance items to be performed.
When the engine oil life reaches 5%,
the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUE
NOW’’ along with the same
maintenance items.

These messages appear on the multiinformation display each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
For details on engine oil life and
maintenance messages, refer to page
439 .
Also refer to page 438 for important
maintenance safety precautions.

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

To use the system, your cell phone
and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
354 for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to HFL and how to
receive or make phone calls, or visit
the acura.com/handsfreelink
website.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４８：２１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００８３

Multi-Information Display
Message Display
When a problem is detected with
your vehicle, a message will be
shown on the multi-information
display.
If this happens, refer to the
applicable pages of this owner’s
manual, and follow the instructions.

See page
63, 502

When there are several messages to
be shown, the system switches the
messages every 5 seconds.
The message is shown until you
push the INFO (▲ or ▼) button.
To see the message again, press the
INFO (▲ or ▼) button, 5 seconds
after the display disappears.

See page
65, 429

See page
62, 500

See page
69, 144

See page
62, 501

See page
68

See page
398

2010 RL

See page
64, 411

See page
502

See page
62, 500

Here is a list of messages shown on
the multi-information display:

See page
499

See page
66, 407

０９／０４／０２ １８：４８：３７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００８４

Multi-Information Display

See page
319

See page
381

See page
34, 63

See page
417

See page
427

See page
69, 414

See page
425

See page
13

See page
67, 425

See page
62

See page
179

See page
62

See page
177

See page
66

See page
178

See page
142

U.S.

Canada

See page
35, 63

See page
458

CONTINUED

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

See page
399

０９／０４／０２ １８：４８：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００８５

Multi-Information Display

See page
441

See page
152

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４８：５４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００８６

Multi-Information Display

To have the driver’s ID detected,
make sure your remote is linked to
the system (see Memory Position
Link on page 104 ). Then use your
remote to unlock the doors (see
Keyless Access Setup on page
108 ).
To change the settings, the ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position, and the vehicle must be
stopped with the transmission in
Park.

To enter the customizing mode,
press and hold the INFO (▲/▼)
button for more than 3 seconds while
the multi-information display is in its
normal mode.
Instruments and Controls

Customized Settings
With the multi-information display
and the INFO (▲/▼) and SEL/
RESET buttons on the right side of
the steering wheel, you can
customize some vehicle control
settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or
‘‘DRIVER 2’’. If ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,
customizing is not possible.

If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, or move the shift lever out
of Park, the display will change to
the normal screen.
You cannot customize the settings
under these conditions:
When the keyless memory
settings are off (see page 173 ).
If you disconnect the battery, and
then do not unlock the door.
When the multi-information
display does not show the driver’s
ID.

The first customizing menu is:
CHG SETTING (see page 87 )
DEFAULT ALL (see page 85 )
Refer to the following table for a
brief summary of each customizable
setting and its default. For more
information, refer to the page
number references in the table.

CONTINUED

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４９：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００８７

Multi-Information Display
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
CHG SETTING
(see page 87)

CUSTOMIZE GROUP
ACC SETUP
(see page 89)

METER SETUP
(see page 94)

CUSTOMIZE MENU
PRE-RUNNING CAR
DETECT BEEP
ACC DISPLAY SPEED
UNIT
LANGUAGE
SELECTION

Description
Causes the system to beep when a
vehicle ahead of you gets too close.
Changes the ACC display speed
unit.
Changes the language used in the
display.

ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY

Changes the outside temperature
reading above or below its current
reading.
Causes trip meter A, the average
fuel economy, and the average
speed to reset when you refuel.
Resets the elapsed time of your
current trip.

TRIP A RESET with
REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME RESET

POSITION SETUP
(see page 103)

MEMORY POSITION
LINK

AUTO TILT &
TELESCOPIC
＊1 : Default setting
＊2 : Default setting for U.S. models
＊3 : Default setting for Canadian model

2010 RL

Changes the driver’s seat, the
steering wheel, and the outside
mirror positions to your stored
setting.
Moves the steering wheel fully in
and out when the key is removed.

CUSTOMIZE SET UP
ON＊1
OFF
mph＊2
previous
km/h＊3
setting
ENGLISH＊1
FRENCH
SPANISH
−5°F∼±0°F＊2∼5°F
−3°C∼±0°C＊3∼3°C

Page
90
92
95

ON
OFF＊1

IGN OFF＊1
TRIP A
TRIP B
ON＊1
OFF

101

ON＊1
OFF

106

104

０９／０４／０２ １８：４９：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００８８

Multi-Information Display
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
CHG SETTING
(see page 87)

CUSTOMIZE GROUP
KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP
(see page 108)

CUSTOMIZE MENU
DOOR UNLOCK MODE

KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

LIGHTING SETUP
(see page 115)

INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF
TIMER
AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY

DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP
(see page 122)
＊:

AUTO DOOR LOCK

CUSTOMIZE SET UP
DRIVER DOOR
ONLY ＊
ALL DOORS
ON＊
OFF

Page
109

111

ON＊
OFF

113

60 SEC
30 SEC＊
15 SEC
60 SEC
30 SEC 0 SEC
15 SEC＊
MAX
MIN
HIGH
MID＊
LOW
SHIFT FROM P
WITH VEH SPD＊
OFF

116

Instruments and Controls

KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
FLASH

Description
Changes which doors unlock when
you use the remote or grab the
driver’s door handle.
Causes some exterior lights to
blink twice when you unlock the
doors by grabbing the driver’s
door handle.
Cause the beeper to sound twice
when you unlock the doors by
grabbing the driver’s door handle.
Changes how long (in seconds)
the interior lights stay on after you
close the doors.
Changes how long (in seconds)
the exterior lights stay on after
you close the driver’s door.
Changes the light level that causes
the headlights to come on. The
headlight switch needs to be in the
AUTO position.
Changes when the doors
automatically lock.

118

120

123

Default setting

CONTINUED

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４９：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００８９

Multi-Information Display
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY
CHG SETTING
(see page 87)

CUSTOMIZE GROUP
DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP
(see page 122)

CUSTOMIZE MENU
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

Description
Changes when the doors
automatically unlock.

DOOR LOCK MODE

Changes which doors unlock with the
first push of the remote’s unlock
button.
The exterior lights flash each time
you press the LOCK or UNLOCK
button.
Changes how long it takes (in
seconds) for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you
unlock the driver’s door without
opening it.
Changes the wiper operation among
two settings when the wiper switch is
in the INT position.
Changes all settings to the default.

KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER

WIPER SETUP
(see page 133)

WIPER ACTION

DEFAULT ALL
(see page 85)
＊:

Default setting

2010 RL

CUSTOMIZE SET UP
SHIFT TO P＊
IGN OFF
OFF
DRIVER DOOR ＊
ALL DOORS

Page
125

127

ON＊
OFF

129

90 SEC
60 SEC
30 SEC＊

131

INTERMITTENT
WITH VEH SPD＊

134

SET
CANCEL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４９：２１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００９０

Multi-Information Display
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on this page.

DEFAULT ALL

Use the INFO (▲/▼) button on the
steering wheel to select the settings
and the SEL/RESET button to enter
your selections.
If you want to set the default settings,
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
select DEFAULT ALL, then press
the SEL/RESET button.

If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

CONTINUED

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

If you want to change any vehicle
control settings, select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４９：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００９１

Multi-Information Display

To set the default settings again,
select DEFAULT ALL, and press the
SEL/RESET button. Then select
SET, and press the SEL/RESET
button.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
see the above display for several
seconds, then the screen returns to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

2010 RL

If DEFAULT ALL is not set, you will
see the above display for several
seconds, then the screen goes back
to the normal message mode. Repeat
the procedure to select DEFAULT
ALL.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４９：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００９２

Multi-Information Display
CHG SETTING
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:

While CHG SETTING in the
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY is shown on
the multi-information display, press
the SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to ACC SETUP in the
CUSTOMIZE GROUP.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown on the next page. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
SETUP
METER SETUP
POSITION SETUP
KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
WIPER SETUP

０９／０４／０２ １８：４９：３９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００９３

Multi-Information Display

ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL SETUP
see page 89
METER SETUP
see page 94
POSITION
SETUP
see page 103
KEYLESS
ACCESS SETUP
see page 108
LIGHTING
SETUP
see page 115
DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP
see page 122

Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.

WIPER SETUP
see page 133

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４９：４８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００９４

Multi-Information Display
Adaptive Cruise Control Setup
If equipped

Here are the two custom settings for
adaptive cruise control (ACC):
Instruments and Controls

PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECT
BEEP
ACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT

see page 90

While the multi-information display
is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP
screen, select ACC SETUP by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the display changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.

see page 92

CONTINUED

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：４９：５３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００９５

Multi-Information Display
Pre-Running Car Detect Beep

When PRE-RUNNING CAR
DETECT BEEP is set to ON, one
beep sounds when the ACC detects a
vehicle in front of you. You also hear
a beep when that vehicle goes out of
the range of your vehicle’s radar
sensor.

While the multi-information display
is in the ACC SETUP of the
CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to the above display.

2010 RL

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

０９／０４／０２ １８：４９：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００９６

Multi-Information Display

If you choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the prerunning car detect beep setup.

To exit PRE-RUNNING CAR
DETECT BEEP without changing
the current setting, select EXIT by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

CONTINUED

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When your choice is set, the display
changes to the screen shown above
for several seconds, and then goes
back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５０：０４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００９７

Multi-Information Display
Adaptive Cruise Control Display
Speed Unit

To change the unit of measurement
from mph to km/h, do this:

While the multi-information display
is in the ACC SETUP of the
CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until
you see the above display.

2010 RL

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above. The
highlighted unit, mph or km/h, is
the current setting. To change the
setting, press the INFO (▲/▼)
button until the unit you want is
highlighted, then press the SEL/
RESET button.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５０：１０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００９８

Multi-Information Display

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the ACC
display speed unit setup.

To exit ACC DISPLAY SPEED
UNIT without changing the current
setting, select EXIT by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５０：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ００９９

Multi-Information Display
Meter Setup
Here are the four custom settings
for the meter setup:
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A RESET with REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME RESET

see page 95

While METER SETUP is shown in
the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the
multi-information display, press the
SEL/RESET button.

see page 97

Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

see page 99

Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.

2010 RL

see page 101

０９／０４／０２ １８：５０：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１００

Multi-Information Display
Language Selection

There are three language selections
you can make: English, French, and
Spanish. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions:

Select the desired language by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

While METER SETUP is shown in
the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the
multi-information display, press the
SEL/RESET button. You will see the
above display.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５０：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１０１

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.
All messages on the multiinformation display will be shown in
the language you selected.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
language selection setup.

2010 RL

To exit LANGUAGE SELECTION
without changing the current setting,
select EXIT by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button. The screen goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５０：３７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１０２

Multi-Information Display
Adjust Outside Temp. Display

While the multi-information display
is in the METER SETUP of the
CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until
you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above. The
highlighted number is the current
setting above or below the outside
temperature. Press the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly until the
number you want appears, then
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter your selection.

CONTINUED

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is a few
degrees above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by
following these instructions:

０９／０４／０２ １８：５０：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１０３

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
adjust outside air temperature
display setup.

2010 RL

To exit ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY without changing the
current setting, select EXIT by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５０：４８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１０４

Multi-Information Display
Trip A Reset with Refuel

To cause trip A, average fuel
economy A, and average speed to
reset every time you refuel your
vehicle, follow these instructions:

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

CONTINUED

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

While METER SETUP is shown in
the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the
multi-information display, press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until
you see the above display.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５０：５４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１０５

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the trip
A reset with refuel setup.

100

2010 RL

To exit TRIP A RESET with
REFUEL without changing the
current setting, select EXIT by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５１：０２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１０６

Multi-Information Display
Elapsed Time Reset

There are three elapsed time reset
choices you can make:

TRIP A − The elapsed time is reset
when Trip A is reset.
TRIP B − The elapsed time is reset
when Trip B is reset.
While METER SETUP is shown in
the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the
multi-information display, press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until
you see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

101

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

IGN OFF − The elapsed time is
reset when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５１：０８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１０７

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
elapsed time reset setup.

102

2010 RL

To exit ELAPSED TIME RESET
without changing the current setting,
select EXIT by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button. The screen goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５１：１６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１０８

Multi-Information Display
Position Setup
There are two position setups you
can make:

While the multi-information display
is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP
screen, select POSITION SETUP by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
and then press the SEL/RESET
button.

Instruments and Controls

MEMORY POSITION LINK
AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC
see page 104

see page 106

CONTINUED

103

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５１：２２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１０９

Multi-Information Display
Memory Position Link

When Memory Position Link is set
to ON, the driver’s seat, the steering
wheel, and the outside mirror
positions move to the positions
stored in memory. To cause the
memory to activate, open the driver’s
door with the remote, or grab the
door handle while carrying the
remote.
To set the seat memory position, see
page 163 . For information on using
the remote, see page 173 .

While the multi-information display
is in the POSITION SETUP screen
of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press
the SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to the above display.

104

2010 RL

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５１：２８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１１０

Multi-Information Display

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
memory position link setup.

To exit MEMORY POSITION LINK
without changing the current setting,
select EXIT by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button. The screen goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

CONTINUED

105

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５１：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１１１

Multi-Information Display
Auto Tilt & Telescopic

When AUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC
is set to ON, the steering wheel
automatically moves fully in and up
when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position and release it,
or when you remove the built-in key
from the ignition switch.

While the multi-information display
is in the POSITION SETUP screen
of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press
the SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until
you see the above display.

106

2010 RL

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５１：４１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１１２

Multi-Information Display

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the auto
tilt and telescopic setup.

To exit AUTO TILT &
TELESCOPIC without changing the
current setting, select EXIT by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

107

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５１：４９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１１３

Multi-Information Display
Keyless Access Setup
There are three settings in the
keyless access setup:
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

see page 109

While the multi-information display
is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP
screen, select KEYLESS ACCESS
SETUP by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button.

see page 111

Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the custom setting then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

see page 113
Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.

108

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５１：５５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１１４

Multi-Information Display
Door Unlock Mode

While the multi-information display
is in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP
screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP,
press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select DRIVER DOOR ONLY or
ALL DOORS by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button to enter your
selection.

CONTINUED

109

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

To select whether the driver’s door
or all doors unlock when you open
the driver’s door with the remote or
by grabbing the door handle (while
carrying the remote), follow these
instructions:

０９／０４／０２ １８：５２：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１１５

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the door
unlock mode setup.

110

2010 RL

To exit DOOR UNLOCK MODE
without changing the current setting,
select EXIT by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button. The screen goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５２：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１１６

Multi-Information Display
Keyless Access Light Flash

The same exterior lights blink once
when you lock the doors by touching
the door lock sensor while carrying
the remote.
While the multi-information display
is in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP
screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP,
press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes to CUSTOMIZE
MENU. Press the INFO (▲/▼)
button until you see the above
display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

CONTINUED

111

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
FLASH is set to ON, some exterior
lights blink twice when you unlock
the doors by grabbing the driver’s
door handle while carrying the
remote.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５２：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１１７

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
keyless access light flash setup.

112

2010 RL

To exit KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT
FLASH without changing the
current setting, select EXIT by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５２：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１１８

Multi-Information Display
Keyless Access Beep

When you lock the doors by
touching the door lock sensor while
carrying the remote, the beeper
sounds once.
While the multi-information display
is in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP
screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP,
press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes to CUSTOMIZE
MENU. Press the INFO (▲/▼)
button until you see the above
display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

CONTINUED

113

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP is
set to ON, the beeper sounds twice
when you unlock the doors by
grabbing the drivers door handle
while carrying the remote.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５２：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１１９

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
keyless access beep setup.

114

2010 RL

To exit KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
without changing the current setting,
select EXIT by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button. The screen goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５２：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１２０

Multi-Information Display
Lighting Setup
There are three settings in the
lighting setup:

Instruments and Controls

INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY

see page 116

While CUSTOMIZE GROUP is
shown on the multi-information
display, select LIGHTING SETUP by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
see page 118

Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button, until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.

see page 120

CONTINUED

115

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５２：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１２１

Multi-Information Display
Interior Light Dimming Time

The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors and the trunk. To
change how long the lights stay on
before they fade out, follow these
instructions:

While LIGHTING SETUP is shown
in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the
multi-information display, press the
SEL/RESET button. You will see the
above display.

116

2010 RL

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select how long you want the lights
to stay on before they fade out (60,
30, or 15 seconds) by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５２：４５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１２２

Multi-Information Display

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
interior light dimming time setup.

To exit INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME without changing
the current setting, select EXIT by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

CONTINUED

117

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５２：５１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１２３

Multi-Information Display
Headlight Auto Off Timer

The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you close the driver’s
door and take the remote with you.
To change how long the lights stay
on before they go off, follow these
instructions:

While the multi-information display
is in the LIGHTING SETUP screen
of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press
the SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until
you see the above display.

118

2010 RL

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select how long you want the lights
to stay on before they go off (0, 15,
30, or 60 seconds) by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５２：５７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１２４

Multi-Information Display

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
headlight auto off timer setup.

To exit HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF
TIMER without changing the
current setting, select EXIT by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

CONTINUED

119

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５３：０５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１２５

Multi-Information Display
Auto Light Sensitivity

The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity
from the following five levels:
MAX −
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
HIGH −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat bright.
MID −
The headlights come on when it is as
bright as sunset or sunrise.
LOW −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat dark.
MIN −
The headlights come on when it is
dark.

While LIGHTING SETUP is shown
in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP of the
multi-information display, press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to CUSTOMIZE MENU.
Press the INFO (▲/▼) button until
you see the above display.

120

2010 RL

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select from five levels of sensitivity
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５３：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１２６

Multi-Information Display

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
headlight auto light sensitivity setup.

To exit AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
without changing the current setting,
select EXIT by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button. The screen goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

121

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５３：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１２７

Multi-Information Display
Door/Window Setup
There are five settings to choose
from in the door/window setup:
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

see page 123

see page 125

While CUSTOMIZE GROUP is
shown on the multi-information
display, select DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button, and then press the SEL/
RESET button.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button, until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

see page 127

see page 129

Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.

122

2010 RL

see page 131

０９／０４／０２ １８：５３：２９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１２８

Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Lock

There are three settings you can
choose from:

WITH VEH SPD −
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
15 km/h).
OFF −
The auto door lock mode is
deactivated all the time.

While DOOR/WINDOW SETUP is
shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP
of the multi-information display,
press the SEL/RESET button. You
will see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

123

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５３：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１２９

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the auto
door lock setup.

124

2010 RL

To exit AUTO DOOR LOCK without
changing the current setting, select
EXIT by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button, then press the SEL/RESET
button. The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５３：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１３０

Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Unlock

There are three settings you can
choose from:

IGN OFF − The driver’s door or all
the doors, depending on the door
lock mode setting (see page 127 ),
unlock when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
OFF − The auto door unlock mode
is deactivated all the time.

While DOOR/WINDOW SETUP is
shown in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP
of the multi-information display,
press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes to CUSTOMIZE
MENU. Press the INFO (▲/▼)
button until you see the above
display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

125

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

SHIFT TO P − The driver’s door or
all the doors, depending on the door
lock mode setting (see page 127 ),
unlock when you move the shift
lever to Park.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５３：４８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１３１

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the auto
door unlock setup.

126

2010 RL

To exit AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
without changing the current setting,
select EXIT by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button. The screen goes
back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５３：５４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１３２

Multi-Information Display
Door Lock Mode

To select whether the driver’s door
unlocks or all the doors unlock when
you unlock the doors with the
remote, follow these instructions.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select DRIVER DOOR or ALL
DOORS by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button to enter your
selection.

CONTINUED

127

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

While the multi-information display
is in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
screen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP,
press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes to CUSTOMIZE
MENU. Press the INFO (▲/▼)
button until you see above display.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５３：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１３３

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the door
lock mode setup.

128

2010 RL

To exit DOOR LOCK MODE
without changing the current setting,
select EXIT by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, and then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５４：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１３４

Multi-Information Display
Keyless Lock Acknowledgement

When you press the UNLOCK
button on the remote to unlock the
doors, the exterior lights blink twice
to verify that the doors are unlocked
and the security system is turned off.
To turn this feature on or off, follow
these instructions.

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

CONTINUED

129

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When you press the LOCK button
on the remote to lock the doors and
the trunk, and then press the button
again within 5 seconds, a beeper
sounds once and the exterior lights
blink once to verify that the doors
are locked and the security system is
set.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５４：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１３５

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
keyless lock acknowledgment setup.

130

2010 RL

To exit KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT without
changing the current setting, select
EXIT by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button, then press the SEL/RESET
button. The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５４：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１３６

Multi-Information Display
Security Relock Timer

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select the relock time you want (90,
60, or 30 seconds) by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

CONTINUED

131

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When you unlock the doors by
pressing the UNLOCK button on the
remote, but do not open any door,
the doors relock and the security
system sets within 30 seconds. To
change the relock time, follow these
instructions.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５４：２５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１３７

Multi-Information Display

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
security relock timer setup.

132

2010 RL

To exit SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER without changing the
current setting, select EXIT by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５４：３２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１３８

Multi-Information Display
Wiper Setup
The changeable setting under
WIPER SETUP is called WIPER
ACTION. To get into WIPER
ACTION, do this:
Instruments and Controls

While the multi-information display
is in the CUSTOMIZE GROUP
screen, select WIPER SETUP by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.

see page 134

Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
WIPER ACTION, then press the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selection.

Press the ▲ or ▼ button.
Press the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED

133

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５４：３９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１３９

Multi-Information Display
Wiper Action

You can select from these two
settings when the wiper switch is in
the INT (intermittent) position:
INTERMITTENT − The
intermittent operation varies
according to the selection you make
on the wiper lever’s intermittent
control ring.
WITH VEH SPD − The intermittent
operation varies according to vehicle
speed.

While the multi-information display
is in the WIPER SETUP screen of
the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
changes to the above display.

134

2010 RL

Press the SEL/RESET button. The
screen changes as shown above.
Select INTERMITTENT or WITH
VEH SPD by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button, then press the SEL/
RESET button to enter your
selection.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５４：４５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１４０

Multi-Information Display

If your choice is not set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE SETUP. If this
happens, you need to repeat the
wiper action setup.

To exit WIPER ACTION without
changing the current setting, select
EXIT by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button, then press the SEL/RESET
button. The screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE MENU.

135

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When your choice is set, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
then the screen goes back to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５４：５４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１４１

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

PADDLE SHIFTERS
(P.403)

INSTRUMENT
PANEL BRIGHTNESS
(P.146)

WINDSHIELD WIPER/
WASHER (P.137)

HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNAL/FOG
LIGHTS (P.140, 142)

PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.35)

COLLISION MITIGATION
BRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS)
OFF SWITCH＊4 (P.416)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BUTTON(P.147)/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
(P.162)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.316)/
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC) BUTTONS＊4 (P.319, 324)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.430)
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH＊4
(P.145)
HEADLIGHT WASHER
SWITCH＊2 (P.138)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.161)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS (P.148)

＊1
＊2
＊3
＊4

:
:
:
:

HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.146)

MULTI INFORMATION
DISPLAY BUTTONS (P.71)
HORN＊1
BLUETOOTH
DISTANCE BUTTON＊4
HANDSFREELINK
(P.328, 333)
BUTTONS (P.354)
STEERING WHEEL
VOICE CONTROL
AUDIO CONTROLS (P.278) BUTTONS＊3 (P.304)

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
Canadian models only
On models with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.
If equipped.

136

2010 RL

FRONT SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES (P.181)/
FRONT SEAT HEATER AND
SEAT VENTILATION BUTTONS＊4
(P.182)

０９／０４／０２ １８：５５：０３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１４２

Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.

LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.

MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
Instruments and Controls

OFF − The wipers are not activated.

ADJUSTMENT RING

1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers

INT − The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle speed.
To change the ‘‘WIPER ACTION’’
setting, see page 134 .
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay (
position), the
wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

CONTINUED

137

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５５：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１４３

Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Washer − Pull back
and hold the wiper control lever.
The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run
at low speed, then complete one
more sweep after you release the
lever.
When you activate the windshield
washer with the headlights turned
on, the headlight washer will be
activated under certain conditions.
For more information, see Headlight
Washers section in the next column.

Headlight Washers
Canadian models only

HEADLIGHT WASHER SWITCH

The headlight washers can be
operated at any time by pressing the
headlight washer button located next
to the steering wheel column. The
headlights must be turned on to use
this button. In addition, the headlight
washer operates without pressing
the button at the first time you turn
on the windshield washers after you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.

138

2010 RL

The headlight washers use the same
fluid reservoir as the windshield
washers.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５５：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１４４

Windshield Wipers and Washers
Wiper Arm Positions

WIPER ARMS

Winter position

WIPER ARMS

HOLDING
LOCATIONS

Adjust the wiper arms to the winter
position by holding both arms as
shown in the illustration at the same
time. Pull on the arm, parallel to the
windshield, until it locks in the
higher position.

Summer position

HOLDING
LOCATIONS

To return to the summer position,
push the same area of both arms the
other direction.

A heavy build-up of snow or ice on
the wiper arms will cause them to
automatically park in the winter
position.

139

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

The windshield wiper arms have two
parked positions: winter and summer.
In the winter position, the arms sit
slightly above the edge of the hood.
This reduces the possibility of
damage to the wiper arms or
windshield wiper motor by a build-up
of snow and ice.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５５：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１４５

Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.

1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and indicator lights
4. AUTO
5. Headlights on
6. High beams
7. Flash high beams
8. Fog lights off
9. Fog lights on

Headlights − The rotating switch
on the left lever controls the lights.
Turning this switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the parking lights,
taillights, instrument panel lights,
side-marker lights, and rear license
plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch released after turned
to the LOCK (0) position or when
the built-in key is removed from the
ignition switch, you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.

140

2010 RL

When the light switch is in the
‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position.
High Beams − To switch from low
beams to high beams, push the left
lever forward until you hear a click.
The blue high beam indicator will
come on (see page 65 ). Pull it back
to return to low beams. To flash the
high beams, pull the lever back
lightly, then release it. The high
beams stay on as long as you hold
the lever back.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５５：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１４６

Turn Signals and Headlights
AUTO − The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights, all
other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights when it
senses low ambient light.

The lights will remain on when you
turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you open
and close the driver’s door. To turn
them on again, either turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position or turn the light switch to
the
position.

LIGHT SENSOR

To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page
120 .
Do not leave the light switch in
AUTO if you will not be driving the
vehicle for an extended period (a
week or more). You should also turn
off the lights if you plan to leave the
engine idling or off for a long time.

The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.

141

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

To turn on automatic lighting, turn
the light switch to AUTO. The lights
will come on automatically when the
outside light level becomes low (at
dusk, for example). The lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
The lights and indicator will turn off
automatically when the system
senses high ambient light.

Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking
facilities.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５５：３９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１４７

Turn Signals and Headlights
Fog Lights

Daytime Running Lights
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.

Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
With the light switch in the AUTO
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on
automatically. They will go off when
the headlights turn off.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.

142

2010 RL

When the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the
daytime running lights are off.
Follow the procedure in the left
column to turn them on.

０９／０４／０３ １６：１３：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１４８

Turn Signals and Headlights

To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page 118 .
The automatic lighting off feature
activates if you leave the headlight
switch in the ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’
position or if the lights are turned on
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position, turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position, then open
and close the driver’s door.

If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position with the
headlight switch on, but do not open
the door, the lights turn off after 10
minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is
in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position).

Instruments and Controls

Automatic Lighting Off Feature
This feature turns off the headlights,
all other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds after you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position and
close the driver’s door.

The lights turn on again when you
unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
go off. With the driver’s door open,
you will hear a lights-on reminder
chime.

143

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５５：５３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１４９

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
AFS Indicator

If equipped

The adaptive front lighting system
(AFS) helps to improve visibility
during nighttime driving. The AFS
controls the aiming direction and
lighting distribution of the low
beams according to the amount of
turn applied to the steering wheel
during cornering or turning. Press
the AFS OFF switch to turn the AFS
on and off when the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position and the
headlights are turned on.

If the AFS indicator comes on and
starts blinking while driving, pull to
the side of the road when it is safe,
and turn off the engine. If the AFS
indicator keeps blinking, or starts
blinking again while driving after
turning the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, the AFS is not working
properly (see page 69 ). Have the
AFS inspected by your dealer.
Without AFS, your vehicle still has
normal lighting ability to continue
driving.
When the AFS indicator comes on,
you will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 78 ).

144

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５６：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１５０

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
AFS Off Switch

Here are some operating
characteristics of the AFS:

AFS OFF SWITCH

This switch is at the right side of the
left vent. Press it to turn the AFS on
and off. When AFS is off, the AFS
indicator comes on as a reminder
when you turn on the headlights.

At a stop, the right headlight turns
right when you turn the steering
wheel to the right. But the left
headlight does not turn left when
you turn the steering wheel to the
left. This prevents the left
headlight from pointing at
oncoming traffic.

If the headlights do not seem to be
properly aimed, have the automatic
headlight adjusting system inspected
by your dealer.

AFS is turned off when the shift
lever is in the R position.

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the AFS is
turned on if it was on previously.

145

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

The system requires an
initialization period. It does not
begin to operate until you have
driven the vehicle a short distance.

Automatic Headlight Adjusting
System
The AFS works with the automatic
headlight adjusting system to sense
changes in vehicle height due to
driving and loading conditions of
passengers and luggage, and adjusts
the vertical aim of the low beam
headlights automatically to
compensate for load.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５６：０８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１５１

Hazard Warning Button, Instrument Panel Brightness
Hazard Warning Button

U.S. CANADA

Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.

Instrument Panel Brightness

ADJUSTMENT BUTTON

Adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel by pressing the ＋
or − button. Press the ＋ button to
increase the brightness and the −
button to decrease it. The brightness
can be set differently for when the
headlights are on, and when they are
off.

146

2010 RL

The level of brightness is shown on
the multi-information display while
you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５６：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１５２

Instrument Panel Brightness, Rear Window Defogger
Rear Window Defogger
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

have to turn it on again when you
restart the vehicle.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.

The rear window defogger clears fog,
frost, and thin ice from the window.
Push the defogger button to turn it
on and off. Pushing this button also
turns the mirror heaters on and off.
The indicator in the button comes on
to show the defogger is on. If you do
not turn it off, the defogger will shut
itself off after 5 to 40 minutes
(depending on the ambient
temperature). It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You

147

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or
. To cancel the glare
reduction function, set the
brightness to the highest level, then
press the ＋ button. You will hear a
beep when it is canceled.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５６：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１５３

Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.

Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Move the steering wheel in, out, up,
or down by pushing and holding the
adjustment switch in that direction.

148

2010 RL

Release the switch when the
steering wheel reaches the desired
position. Make sure the steering
wheel points towards your chest, not
toward your face, and that you can
see the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５６：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１５４

Steering Wheel Adjustments
When you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position and release it,
or remove the built-in key from the
ignition switch, the steering wheel
automatically moves fully in and up.

Steering wheel movement is also
controlled by the driving position
memory system (see page 163 ).
To change the ‘‘AUTO TILT &
TELESCOPIC’’ setting, see page
106 .

Instruments and Controls

The steering wheel returns to its
original position when you push the
ignition switch or insert the built-in
key back in the ignition switch.

If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
fuse for the power tilt and telescopic
steering wheel is removed, the
power tilt and telescopic steering
wheel system needs to be reset
when you reconnect the battery or
install the fuse.
Push the ignition switch for more
than 1 second and release it, or
insert the built-in key into the
ignition switch, and remove it. The
steering wheel automatically moves
fully in and up to let you know the
system is reset.

149

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５６：３３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１５５

Keys and Locks
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Acura-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.

BUILT-IN KEYS

Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.

KEY NUMBER TAG

Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.

The built-in key (see page 180 ) fits
all the locks on your vehicle.

The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.

150

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５６：４１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１５６

Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine will not
start.

If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your remote
or built-in key, contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
If you have lost your remote or
built-in key and cannot start the
engine, contact your dealer.

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

Always take the keyless access remote
and built-in key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle alone.

151

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go out. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the Honda smart key or
built-in key. Turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position, release the
ignition switch and push it, or
remove the built-in key, and reinsert
it. Then turn the switch to the ON
(II) position again.

The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５６：５０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１５７

Ignition Switch
BUILT-IN KEY

slightly.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the ignition switch. Firmly
turn the steering wheel to the left or
right as you turn the ignition switch.

IGNITION SWITCH
COVER

The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
To use the built-in key, you have to
remove the cover (see page 180 ).
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the built-in key only in this
position. To turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position, the shift
lever must be in Park, and you must
push the knob or built-in key in

ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ACCESSORY (I) position, an
‘‘ACCESSORY (I) POSITION’’
message is shown on the multiinformation display.
ON (II) − This is the normal
ignition switch position when driving.
Several of the indicators on the
instrument panel come on as a test
when you turn the ignition switch
from the ACCESSORY (I) to the ON
(II) position.

152

2010 RL

START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the ignition switch.
If you open the driver’s door and
leave the key in the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder beeper, and
a message appears on the multiinformation display according to the
ignition switch position. When the
ignition switch is in the ACC (I)
position, a ‘‘RETURN IGNITION
SWITCH TO LOCK (0) POSITION’’
message is shown on the multiinformation display. When the
ignition switch is in the LOCK (0)
position, a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
message is shown on the multiinformation display.
The shift lever must be in Park
before you turn the ignition switch
knob to the LOCK (0) position or
remove the built-in key from the
ignition switch.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５７：００ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１５８

Door Locks
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH

To lock any door when getting out of
the vehicle, pull the lock tab and
close the door.

Each front door has a power door
lock master switch. Either switch
locks and unlocks all doors. Push the
switch down to lock all doors and up
to unlock them.
Each door has a lock tab above the
inside door handle. Pull the tab to
lock the door and push it to unlock.
When you pull the tab on the driver’s
door, all the doors lock.

To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCK
MODE’’ setting, see page 109 .
When the vehicle speed reaches
about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, all
the doors lock automatically.

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK’’ setting, see page 125 .
Lockout Prevention

With the driver’s door open and the
built-in key in the ignition, both
master door lock switches are
disabled. They are not disabled if the
driver’s door is closed. Pushing the
switch down on the open front
passenger’s door will lock all doors.
If you try to lock an open driver’s
door by pulling the lock tab rearward
with the remote inside the vehicle
and closing the driver’s door, the
driver’s door will unlock.

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page 123 .

153

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

All doors can be locked from the
outside by using the built-in key in
the driver’s door. To unlock only the
driver’s door, insert the built-in key,
turn it clockwise, and release it. The
remaining doors unlock when you
turn the built-in key a second time
within a few seconds.

When you shift to P after driving, the
driver’s door unlocks.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５７：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１５９

Trunk
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

If the doors are locked, press the
trunk release switch on the trunk
lid with the remote in keyless
access operating range.

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead or
is disconnected, you can open the
trunk from the rear seat by pulling
the trunk release handle. Reach the
handle through the trunk passthrough.

You can open the trunk in any of
four ways:
Press the trunk release button on
the driver’s door.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 56 .

If the doors are unlocked, press
the trunk release switch on the
trunk lid.

154

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５７：１６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１６０

Trunk, Childproof Door Locks
TRUNK MAIN SWITCH

Emergency Trunk Opener

Childproof Door Locks
unlock

RELEASE LEVER

To protect items in the trunk, you
can disable the trunk-release button
on the driver’s door, the trunk lid,
and the remote. To do this, turn off
the trunk main switch in the glove
box, lock the glove box, and lock the
trunk pass-through cover with the
built-in key.

As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the right corner in
the trunk so the trunk can be opened
from the inside. To open the trunk,
push the release lever to the left.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
For more information about child
safety, see page 42 .

LEVER

The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, push the lock
tab in, and use the outside door
handle.

155

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

lock

０９／０４／０２ １８：５７：２７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１６１

Seats
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.

Front Seat Power Adjustments
See pages 15 − 16 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.

The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.

Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.

156

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５７：３６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１６２

Seats
Head Restraints

FRONT

See page 16 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.

RELEASE
BUTTON

LEGS

Your vehicle has adjustable head
restraints on the front seats.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.

SEAT-BACK

Adjusting the Head Restraint

The front head restraints adjust for
height. You need both hands to
adjust a restraint. Do not attempt to
adjust it while driving. To raise it,
pull upward. To lower the restraint,
push the release button sideways,
and push the restraint down.

CONTINUED

157

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.

CUSHION

０９／０４／０２ １８：５７：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１６３

Seats
Removing the Head Restraint

To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seatback.

REAR

Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.

158

2010 RL

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT
TILT BUTTON

You can raise the rear head
restraints by hand.
To lower the rear head restraints for
better visibility, press the rear head
restraint tilt button on the ceiling
console with the ignition switch in
the ON (II) position.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５７：５１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１６４

Seats
Active Head Restraints

against whiplash and injuries to the
neck and upper spine.

For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.

If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by an Acura dealer.

Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Acura
replacement head restraints.

The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants

159

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５８：００ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１６５

Seats
Rear Seat Armrest

Trunk Pass-through Cover
KNOB

Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the passthrough are secured.
For security, this cover can be
locked and unlocked only with the
built-in key. To lock the cover, insert
the key, and turn it clockwise.
Never drive with this cover open and
the trunk lid open.

COVER

The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seat. Pivot it down
to use it.

To open the cover, pull down the
rear seat armrest. Pull on the tab at
the top of the inner partition, and
press on the button to fully release
the cover. To close the cover, swing
it up, and push firmly on the top.
Make sure it latches properly.

160

2010 RL

See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 56 .

０９／０４／０２ １８：５８：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１６６

Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.

INDICATOR

SENSOR

The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.

SELECTOR
SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

1. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
2. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.

CONTINUED

161

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

AUTO BUTTON

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

０９／０４／０２ １８：５８：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１６７

Mirrors
3. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
Outside mirror positions can be
stored in the driving position
memory system (see page 163 ).

Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
Both outside door mirrors have a
reverse tilt feature. When in reverse,
the selected mirror will tilt down
slightly to improve your view as you
parallel park. Shifting out of reverse
will return the mirror to its original
position.

Power Mirror Heaters
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

To tilt the driver’s mirror, place
the selector switch in the left
position.
To tilt the passenger’s mirror,
place the switch in the right
position.
To turn the feature off, place the
switch in the center position.

162

2010 RL

The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５８：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１６８

Mirrors, Driving Position Memory System
Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature
for the steering wheel, driver’s seat,
and outside mirror positions.

Storing a Driving Position in
Memory
Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.

Two seat, steering wheel, and
outside mirror positions can be
stored in separate memories. You
select a memorized position by
pushing the appropriate button.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. You cannot add a
new driving position to the
memory unless the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position. You can
recall a memorized position with
the ignition switch in any position.

You can also select the memorized
positions by unlocking the doors
with the remote. Each remote has a
driver’s ID (see page 173 ). The
driver’s ID (Driver 1) corresponds to
the memorized positions stored with
the memory button (1). The driver’s
ID (Driver 2) corresponds to the
memorized positions stored with the
memory button (2).

2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page 156 ).
Adjust the steering wheel to a
comfortable position (see page
148).
Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page 161 ).

CONTINUED

163

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

If you do not turn the heaters off,
they will shut themselves off after 5
to 40 minutes (depending on the
ambient temperature). It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition
switch.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５８：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１６９

Driving Position Memory System
MEMORY
BUTTONS

MEMO BUTTON

To cancel the storing procedure
after pressing the MEMO button:

Selecting a Memorized Position
MEMORY BUTTONS

Do not press a memory button
within 5 seconds.
Readjust the seat or steering
position.
Readjust the outside mirror
position.
3. Press the MEMO button on the
driver’s door. You will hear a beep.
The indicator in the memory
buttons (1 and 2) will blink.
Immediately press one of the
memory buttons (1 or 2) until you
hear two beeps. The indicator in
the memory button will stay on.
The current positions of the
driver’s seat, steering wheel, and
outside mirrors are now stored.

Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory.
All stored driving positions will be
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.

To select a memorized position, do
this:
1. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep.

164

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５８：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１７０

Driving Position Memory System

To change the ‘‘MEMORY
POSITION LINK’’ setting, see page
104 .

To stop the system’s automatic
adjustment, do any of the following:
Press any button on the control
panel: MEMO, 1, or 2.
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat or steering
wheel.

You can use the adjustment switches
to change the positions of the seat,
steering wheel, or outside mirrors
after they are in their memorized
position. If you change the
memorized position, the indicator in
the memory button will go out. To
keep this driving position for later
use, you must store it in the driving
position memory.

Shift out of Park.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
If you select a memorized position
without pushing the ignition switch
knob or inserting the built-in key in
the ignition switch, only the seat and
outside mirrors will adjust. To get
the system to also adjust the steering
wheel, push and turn the ignition
switch or insert the built-in key in
the ignition switch. You will hear two
beeps when it is complete.

165

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

The system will move the seat,
steering wheel, and outside mirrors
to the memorized positions. The
indicator in the selected memory
button will flash during movement.
When the adjustments are complete,
you will hear two beeps, and the
indicator will remain on.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５８：５３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１７１

Keyless Access System
Your vehicle has a keyless access
system. When you carry the remote
with you, you can lock/unlock the
door(s), unlock the trunk, and start
the engine without using the built-in
key.
The system may not work if:
The battery of the remote is weak.
There is strong electrical current
nearby.
You carry a cell phone, a laptop
computer, or other electrical
device near the remote.
The remote is covered by metal.
A vehicle is being operated with a
transmitter nearby.
When the remote battery is dead.
When the vehicle battery is dead.

Protect the remote and the built-in
key from direct sunlight, high
temperature, and high humidity.

Always keep the remote and the
built-in key away from any magnetic
material.

Do not drop the remote or the
built-in key, and do not set heavy
objects on them.

You should have received a key
number tag with your built-in key.
You will need this key number if you
ever have to get a lost key replaced.
Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

Keep the remote and the built-in key
away from liquids. If they get wet,
dry them immediately with a soft
cloth.
The built-in keys do not contain
batteries.

Make sure the driver always carries
the remote/built-in key set.

166

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５９：０４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１７２

Keyless Access System
Keys
BUILT-IN KEYS

KEYLESS ACCESS
REMOTES

KEY NUMBER TAG

The following keys come with your
vehicle. Refer to page 180 for how to
separate the keys.
Built-in Key

This key is used to lock/unlock the
doors, glove box, trunk pass-through
cover, and to start the engine (after
you remove the ignition switch cover,
see page 177 ).
Keyless Access Remote

This remote is used to lock/unlock

the doors and unlock the trunk.
When you carry the remote, you can
lock/unlock the doors, unlock the
trunk, and start the engine without a
key.
You can lock/unlock the doors
within about a 32 inch (about 80 cm)
radius from the outside door handle.
You can open the trunk within about
a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from
the trunk release switch.

Anyone can lock/unlock a door or
open the trunk if the remote is
within the operating range of the
door or the trunk.
The remote may not work if:
It is too close to the vehicle.
It is above or below the vehicle,
even when it is within its operating
range.

167

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

OPERATING
RANGE

０９／０４／０２ １８：５９：１６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１７３

Keyless Access System
Unlocking the Door(s)

All the doors unlock when you grab
the handle of the front passenger’s
door.
When you unlock the door(s), some
exterior lights blink twice and the
system beeps twice.
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page
111 .
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP’’ setting, see page 113 .

The handle of each front door has a
sensor. That sensor works with the
remote so you can automatically
unlock/lock the door(s).
By default, only the driver’s door
unlocks when you grab its handle.
To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCK
MODE’’ setting, see page 109 .

If a remote is within operating range
while you wash your vehicle or when
it is raining heavily, the door sensors
may respond by unlocking the doors.
The unlock sensors do not operate
when:
The remote is not within the
operating range.
The remote is too close to the
vehicle.
When the doors are unlocked.

If you wear a glove while grabbing a
front door handle, the door sensor
may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
If you do not open any of the doors
within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock.

168

2010 RL

The remote battery is dead.
The vehicle battery is dead.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５９：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１７４

Keyless Access System
Locking the Doors

If you touch the door lock sensor of
the front door with your hand
wearing a glove, the door sensor may
delay to respond or not respond by
locking the doors.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page
111 .

The lock sensors do not operate if:

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP’’ setting, see page 113 .
DOOR LOCK SENSOR

Each front door has a LOCK/
UNLOCK feature.
When you touch the door lock
sensor of the front door by hand, all
the doors and the trunk will lock.
Before locking the doors, make sure
the remote is not inside the vehicle.
When you lock the doors, some
exterior lights blink once and the

Within 2 seconds of touching the
handle to lock the doors or locking
the doors with remote, pull the
handle to make sure the doors are
actually locked. The door unlock
sensors do not operate for about 2
seconds after the doors are locked.
If a remote is within operating range
while you wash your vehicle or when
it is raining heavily, the door sensors
may respond by locking the doors.

The remote is not within the
operating range.
The doors are open.
The ignition switch is not in the
LOCK (0) position.
The built-in key is in the ignition
switch.
The remote is too close to the
vehicle.
The remote battery is dead.
The vehicle battery is dead.
CONTINUED

169

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

system beeps once. When you
cannot set the security system
because the trunk or hood is open,
no exterior light blinks and/or no
beeper sounds.

０９／０４／０２ １８：５９：３７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１７５

Keyless Access System
Door Lock Prevention

Locking the Trunk

If you open a door, pull its lock tab,
and shut it when the remote is inside
the vehicle, the driver’s door will
unlock. Make sure you carry the
remote with you when you lock the
doors.

Before closing the trunk, make sure
the remote is not in the trunk.
If you close the trunk when the
remote is in it, the system beeps, and
the trunk reopens.

PULL HANDLE

When you close the trunk with all
doors locked, the trunk will lock.
When you unlock all the doors with
the remote, built-in key or power
door lock master switch, the trunk
will unlock.
Use the pull handle when you close
the trunk.

170

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １８：５９：４８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１７６

Keyless Access System
Locking and Unlocking the Trunk
TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

The remote is too close to the
trunk lid.
The remote is on the interior rear
panel.
The remote is too close to the
seat-back of the rear seat or the
seat cushion.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 56 .

Press the trunk release button
inside the vehicle.
Press the trunk button on the
remote.
Pull the trunk release switch when
carrying the remote (the system
beeps once).

Keyless Access Remote
LED

UNLOCK
BUTTON

LOCK
BUTTON

TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON

PANIC
BUTTON

LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash. When you push the LOCK
button twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a beep to verify that the
doors are locked and the security
system is set.

CONTINUED

171

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

When the trunk is locked, you can
open it in any of these ways:

The trunk cannot be locked if:

０９／０４／０２ １８：５９：５７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１７７

Keyless Access System
You cannot lock the doors if any
door, the trunk, or the hood is not
fully closed if the built-in key is in
the ignition switch, or if the ignition
switch is in any position except the
LOCK (0) position.
When you cannot set the security
system because the trunk or hood is
open, no exterior light blinks and/or
no beeper sounds.

UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Press it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you press the button. The
ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the DOOR position) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
any doors within 30 seconds, the
ceiling light fades out. If you relock
the doors with the remote before 30
seconds have elapsed, the ceiling
light will go off immediately.
To change the ‘‘DOOR LOCK
MODE’’ setting, see page 127 .
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME,’’ see page 116 .
If you unlock the doors with the
remote, but do not open any doors
within 30 seconds, the doors
automatically relock and the security
system sets.

172

2010 RL

To change the ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
131 .
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ setting, see
page 129 .
TRUNK − Press this button for
about 1 second to open the trunk.
You cannot open the trunk if the
built-in key is in the ignition or the
ignition switch is in any position
except the LOCK (0) position. You
cannot open the trunk with the
remote if the trunk main switch is
turned off.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote.

０９／０４／０２ １９：００：０９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１７８

Keyless Access System
Keyless Memory SettingsTM

Here are the settings activated with
the remote:
Driving position memory
(see page 163 ).

Audio system settings
(see page 213 ).
DRIVER’S ID

Climate control settings
(see page 205 ).

To turn the keyless memory settings
back on, repeat this procedure. The
LED will blink twice to indicate the
feature has been turned on.
Remote Transmitter Care

When you unlock the door with your
remote, each remote activates the
keyless memory settings related to
that remote. The driver’s ID (Driver
1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back
of each remote.

U.S. RL model

Compass system preferences
(see page 281 ).
Except U.S. RL model

Navigation system preferences
(see the navigation system
manual).
To turn off this feature, press and
hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons at the same time. The LED

Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.

173

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

Customized settings
(see page 81 ).

in the remote will blink once. Then
release the buttons. Doing this
cancels the keyless memory settings
for that remote and restores the
default settings.
Some of them keep the same
settings as they were set previously.

０９／０４／０２ １９：００：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１７９

Keyless Access System
Replacing the Remote Battery

Replace the batteries if necessary.
Battery type: CR2025
Remove the built-in key.
Remove the upper half by carefully
prying on the edge with a coin.

Replace the old batteries with new
batteries. Place the batteries so the
＋ side is facing up. Snap the two
halves of the remote case back
together.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.

174

2010 RL

This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

０９／０４／０２ １９：００：２５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１８０

Keyless Access System
Ignition Switch Operating Range
Make sure you know where the remote
is when you are inside the vehicle.

Make sure you always carry the remote
with you.

The engine may not run, and some
malfunctions may occur, if the
remote is:
Outside the vehicle.
On the dashboard.
On the rear interior panel.
In the glove box.
In the door pockets.
In the trunk, etc.

The engine may not start if the
remote is subjected to strong radio
waves.
Also, the engine may not start if the
remote is too close to the windows.

175

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

Remember that you can start the engine
without using the built-in key when the
remote is inside the vehicle.

０９／０４／０２ １９：００：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１８１

Keyless Access System
Ignition Switch

the beep, the steering wheel is
locked. To unlock the steering wheel,
turn it right and left while turning
the ignition switch at the same time.
If the remote and the vehicle do not
recognize each other, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position, remove the ignition switch
cover, insert the built-in key, and
turn the switch (see pages 152 and
177 ).

To turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, put the
transmission in Park, press the
switch in, and turn it to the LOCK
(0) position. When the transmission
is not in Park, you cannot turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position.
Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure the ignition switch is in the
LOCK (0) position.
If you open the driver’s door with the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) position, a beeper will sound.
You will also see a ‘‘RETURN
IGNITION SWITCH TO LOCK (0)
POSITION’’ message on the multiinformation display.

When you push the ignition switch,
the remote and the vehicle recognize
each other. After the recognition,
the remote indicator flashes, and a
beeper sounds once. After the beep,
turn the ignition switch.
When the remote is out of the
operating range, the ignition switch
is locked.
If the ignition switch cannot be
turned from the LOCK (0) position
to the ACCESSORY (I) position after

176

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：００：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１８２

Keyless Access System

When the beeper sounds after you
close the driver’s door outside the
vehicle, check the position of the
ignition switch and the location of
the remote.
If the engine is running and you
remove the remote from the vehicle,
it will continue to run. But once
turned to the LOCK (0) position, the
engine will not restart until a remote
is brought back into the vehicle.

Removing the Ignition Switch
Cover

Beeper and Message
Keyless Remote Not Detected

IGNITION SWITCH COVER
Instruments and Controls

Also, if you close the door when the
ignition switch is not in the LOCK
(0) position and the remote is not
inside the vehicle, the keyless access
alarm sounds outside the vehicle, a
message appears on the multiinformation display, and the beeper
sounds if the ignition switch is in the
ON (II) position.

pull

push
BUILT-IN KEY

To remove the ignition switch cover,
insert the built-in key (see page 180 ),
then pull the cover out by pulling the
built-in key while pushing it.

When you are pressing the ignition
switch, or when the ignition switch is
in the ON (II) position, the beeper
sounds if you take the remote out of
the vehicle and close the door.

CONTINUED

177

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：００：４９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１８３

Keyless Access System
The outside beeper sounds when
the ignition switch is in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position.
When the ignition switch is in the
ON (II) position, the multiinformation display shows
‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE NOT
DETECTED,’’ and the inside and
outside beepers sound.
The multi-information display
message goes away when you
bring the remote back inside the
vehicle, and close the door or
apply the parking brake.

The engine does not restart if you
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
(0) position when the remote is
outside the vehicle. Check where the
remote is. Make sure that you carry
the remote or built-in key with you
when you operate the ignition switch.
If you pass the remote through an
open window, the system does not
respond. Also, even when the remote
is inside the vehicle, the beeper may
sound when the location of the
remote is not detected due to
surrounding conditions. It is not a
failure. Make sure that you carry the
remote with you.

If the engine is running and you
remove the remote from the
vehicle, it will continue to run.
Once turned to the LOCK (0)
position, the engine will not restart
until a remote is brought back into
the vehicle.

178

2010 RL

Keyless Remote Low Battery

The batteries in the remote normally
last about 2 years. To ensure
maximum battery life, do not store
the remote close to electrical devices
such as computers or TVs. When the
multi-information display shows
‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE LOW
BATTERY,’’ replace the batteries as
soon as possible (see page 174 ).

０９／０４／０２ １９：００：５５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１８４

Keyless Access System
Check Keyless Access System
KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
INDICATOR

The keyless access system
indicator comes on and stays on
while you are driving.

Instruments and Controls

The indicator comes on with the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position.
The multi-information display
shows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESS
ACCESS SYSTEM.’’

The indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Have
your vehicle checked by your dealer
if:

In this case, use the built-in key to
lock/unlock the doors and start the
engine.

179

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０１：０３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１８５

Keyless Access System
Built-in key and Remote

The keyless access system uses an
electric field to identify the remote.

BUILT-IN KEY

If you use medical equipment such
as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your
doctor if the radio waves used by the
remote will affect it.

RELEASE BUTTON

To remove the built-in key, pull it out
while pressing the release button. To
reinstall the built-in key, push the
key into the remote until it clicks.
To avoid damaging the remote and
the built-in key, never pull on the
built-in key unless you are pressing
the release button.

180

2010 RL

Valet Function
The trunk and glove box cannot be
opened when you turn the trunk
main switch off and lock the glove
box and trunk pass-through cover
with the built-in key. Also, the trunk
cannot be opened by using the
remote.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０１：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１８６

Front Seat Heaters
Passenger’s
seat

In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.

HEATERS

Driver’s
seat

RL models

Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat
only has heaters in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag cutoff
system.

Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.

FRONT SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use the heaters.
Push the top of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.

If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.

In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.

181

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

LOW

０９／０４／０２ １９：０１：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１８７

Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation
FRONT SEAT HEATER AND
SEAT VENTILATION
▲ BUTTON
SWITCHES

passenger’s
seat

HEATERS

Driver’s
seat

If equipped

Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters and an air ventilation
system. The passenger seat only has
heaters in the seat bottom because
of the side airbag system.

▼ BUTTON

INDICATORS

The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use the heaters
and the air ventilation system.
To use the heaters, press the ▲
button. The indicator (red) next to
the button will come on. There are
four settings in the heaters:
HI − Three indicators on.
MID − Two indicators on.
LO − One indicator on.
OFF − All indicators off.

182

2010 RL

When you press the ▲ button once,
the heater is set to HI. After the seat
reaches a comfortable temperature,
select MID or LOW by pressing the
▼ button. This will keep the seat
warm. To shut down the heater,
press the ▼ button until the
indicators go off.
In HI, when the seat gets warm, the
heater will change to MID after
about 5 minutes.
In MID, the heater will change to
LOW after about 60 minutes.
In LOW, the heater runs
continuously.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０１：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１８８

Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation
To ventilate the seat, press the ▼
button. The indicator (blue) next to
the button will come on. The air
ventilation system has four settings:

When you press the ▼ button once,
the system is set to HI. To change to
the lower mode, press the ▲ button.
To turn the air ventilation off, press
the ▲ button until the indicators go
off.

Use the HI setting only to heat or
to ventilate the seats quickly,
because it draws large amounts of
current from the battery.

Instruments and Controls

HI − Three indicators on.
MID − Two indicators on.
LO − One indicator on.
OFF − All indicators off.

Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters and the seat
ventilation:

If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters or the seat ventilation,
even on the LO setting. It can
weaken the battery, causing hard
starting.

183

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０１：３３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１８９

Rear Seat Heaters (Canadian models)
LOW

HEATERS
For right outer
seating position

keep the seat warm.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.

HEATERS
For left outer
seating position

The outer rear seat cushions and
seat-backs are equipped with seat
heaters.

In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
REAR SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

The rear seat heater switches are
located under the rear vents. The
left (right) switch controls the seat
heaters on left (right) outer seating
position.
The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use seat heaters.
Push the right side of the switch, HI,
to rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the left side of the switch. This will

184

2010 RL

Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０１：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１９０

Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.

MAIN SWITCH

If the MAIN switch is pushed down
(OFF), the passenger windows
cannot be raised or lowered. Keep
the MAIN switch off when you have
children in the vehicle so they do not
injure themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.

CONTINUED

185

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position before operating any of
the window switches. To open a
window, push the switch down and
hold it. To close the window, pull the
switch up and hold it. Release the
switch to stop the window.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０１：４７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１９１

Power Windows
AUTO − To open the window fully,
push the window switch firmly down
to the second detent, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.

To open or close the window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly to the first
detent, and hold it. The window will
stop when you release the switch.

To close the window fully, pull back
the window switch firmly to the
second detent, then release it. The
window automatically goes all the
way up. To stop the window from
going all the way up, push down on
the window switch briefly.

Auto Reverse
If the window runs into any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it
will reverse direction, and then stop.
To close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.

All window switches also have the
AUTO feature.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.

186

2010 RL

The indicators in the switches come
on when you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position.
The power windows have a key-off
delay. You can still open and close
the windows for up to 10 minutes
after you turn off the ignition switch.
The key-off delay cancels as soon as
you open either front door. You must
then turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position for the power
windows to operate.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０１：５８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１９２

Power Windows

2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. All the
doors unlock, and all four windows
and moonroof start to open. To
stop the windows and moonroof,
release the button.
3. To open the windows and
moonroof further, press the
button again and hold it. If the
windows and the moonroof stop
before the desired position, repeat
steps 1 and 2.
You cannot close the windows or the
moonroof with the remote.

2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.

UNLOCK BUTTON

Open
Close

Opening/Closing the Windows
and Moonroof with the Built-in
Key
You can open and close the windows
and moonroof with the built-in key in
the driver’s door lock.

3. Turn the built-in key clockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
open. To stop the windows and
moonroof, release the built-in key.
4. When the windows or moonroof
stops before opening fully, to open
the windows and moonroof further,
turn and hold the key again
(within 10 seconds).

To open:
1. Insert the built-in key in the driver’s
door lock.
CONTINUED

187

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

Opening the Windows and
Moonroof with the Remote
You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof from outside with the
remote.
1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０２：０６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１９３

Power Windows, Moonroof
To close:
1. Insert the built-in key in the driver’s
door lock.
2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
3. Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
close. To stop the windows and
the moonroof, release the key.

Opening/Closing the Moonroof
with the Ceiling Console Switch
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position before operating the
moonroof switch on the ceiling
console. To open the moonroof, pull
back the moonroof switch. To close
the moonroof, push the moonroof
switch forward. Release the switch
to stop the moonroof.

MOONROOF SWITCH

To open the moonroof fully, pull
back the moonroof switch firmly.
The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
fully, push the switch briefly.

4. To close the windows and
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds).
NOTE: If the windows and the
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

188

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０２：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１９４

Moonroof
To tilt the moonroof, push the center
of the moonroof switch straight up.
To stop the moonroof from tilting
fully open, push the moonroof switch
forward.

To close the moonroof fully, push
the moonroof switch forward to the
second detent, then release it. The
moonroof closes all the way. To stop
the moonroof from closing all the
way, push the switch briefly.

Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.

189

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

To open or close the moonroof
partially, pull back or push forward
on the moonroof switch lightly to the
first detent, and hold it. The
moonroof will stop when you release
the switch.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０２：１７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１９５

Moonroof
Auto Reverse
If the moonroof runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then
use the moonroof switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can still open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch. The
key-off delay cancels as soon as you
open either front door. You must
then turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position for the moonroof to
operate.

If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.

190

2010 RL

Operating the Moonroof with the
Remote Transmitter or the Key
You can use the remote transmitter
or the key to operate the moonroof
from the outside. Refer to page
187 for details.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０２：２１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１９６

Parking Brake

Instruments and Controls

Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes, axles, and tires. A beeper will
sound if the vehicle is put into gear
with the parking brake on.

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

To apply the parking brake, push the
parking brake pedal down with your
foot. To release the parking brake,
push on the pedal again. The parking
brake indicator on the instrument
panel should go out when the
parking brake is fully released with
the engine running (see page 63 ).

191

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０２：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１９７

Interior Convenience Items

FRONT DOOR POCKET

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
INTEGRATED SUNSHADE

POWER REAR SUNSHADE

UTILITY POCKET
GLOVE BOX/OWNER’S MANUAL TRAY
BEVERAGE HOLDER in
REAR SEAT ARMREST

BEVERAGE HOLDER
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK/
USB ADAPTER CABLE

192

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０２：３２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１９８

Interior Convenience Items
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the built-in key.

RELEASE BUTTON

Instruments and Controls

The glove box light comes on only
when the parking lights are on.

An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.

Your vehicle has an owner’s manual
tray inside the glove box. To open
the tray, push the release button up.

To close the tray, push it up.

Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.

193

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０２：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０１９９

Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders

KNOB
LID

BOTTOM PLATE

Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.

Press

Pull up

SEPARATOR

For a short container, put the bottom
plate down, and pull up the knob to
use the separator.

To use the beverage holder, push
the lid.

194

2010 RL

BUTTON

BOTTOM PLATE

For a long container, press the
button in the beverage holder to
raise the bottom plate. Stand the
separator up.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０２：４７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２００

Interior Convenience Items
Console Compartment
LEVER

LATCH

The rear beverage holder is in the
rear seat armrest. Open the
beverage holder by pulling up on the
latch on the front.

To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever and lift the
armrest.

You can put small items in the tray
located in the console compartment
lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
lever, and lift the armrest pad.

To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
The console compartment light is on
when the light switch is in the
or
position.

195

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

LEVER

０９／０４／０２ １９：０２：５６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２０１

Interior Convenience Items
Sun Visors

Do not use the sun visor extension
feature over the rear view mirror.

Vanity Mirror

Make sure to slide the sun visor
back to its original position before
flipping it back in place.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.

To use a sun visor, pull it down. You
can also use a sun visor at the side
window. Remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing the sun
visor toward the side window.
You can extend the sun visor further
by pulling it back.

To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The vanity mirror lights come on
when you pull up the cover.

196

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０３：０５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２０２

Interior Convenience Items
Accessory Power Sockets
Center console

Front Door Pockets
Console compartment

LID

There are two accessory power
sockets. One is located in the front
of the center console. To use the
power socket, push and release the
lid.

The other socket is under the
armrest in the console compartment
storage area. To use the power
socket, pull up the cover.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).

The interior of each front door has
an extendable pocket for maps and
other small, lightweight items. For
safety, be sure both front door
pockets are closed while driving.
When the light switch is in the
or
position, the front door
pocket light is on.

They will not power an automotive
type cigarette lighter element.

197

2010 RL

Instruments and Controls

LID

０９／０４／０２ １９：０３：０９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２０３

Interior Convenience Items
Power Rear Sunshade
POWER REAR
SUNSHADE BUTTON

When you shift to reverse, the
sunshade goes down automatically.
To use it again, shift to another
position, and push the button to raise
it.
If the sunshade stops while moving,
check for and clear any obstacles,
then push the button again.

With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, push the power rear
sunshade button on the ceiling
console to raise the rear sunshade.
Push the button again to lower it.

198

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０３：１５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２０４

Interior Convenience Items
Integrated Sunshades
HOLDER

To prevent the integrated sunshades
from being unhooked due to winds,
leave the rear windows closed while
driving.
Instruments and Controls

HOOK

TAB

The hooks are intended for use only
by the sunshades. Do not hang any
other items on the hooks, as that
could interfere with proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.

HOLE

Each rear door has an integrated
sunshade. To use a sunshade, hold
the tab on the top, insert the
sunshade into the holder, and pull
the sunshade all the way up. Insert
the holes on the sunshade into the
hooks on the window frame.

199

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０３：２３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２０５

Interior Lights
Ceiling Lights
OFF BUTTON
DOOR BUTTON

After pushing the DOOR button, all
the lights come on when you open
any door, unlock the doors with the
remote or built-in key, or turn the
ignition switch from the ON (II) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position to the
LOCK (0) position. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.

CEILING LIGHT
BUTTONS

REAR

FRONT

CEILING LIGHT
BUTTONS

ON BUTTON

The front and rear of the ceiling
have ceiling lights.

Push each ceiling light button to turn
its light on and off.

Push the ON button to turn on all the
ceiling lights. Push the OFF button
to turn them off.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
116 .

200

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０３：２８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２０６

Interior Lights
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy light in each door
comes on when the door is opened,
and goes out when the door is closed.

Front

COURTESY LIGHTS

Instruments and Controls

Your vehicle also has a courtesy light
in the ignition switch. This light
comes on when you open the driver’s
door. It fades out in about 30
seconds after the door is closed.

Rear

COURTESY LIGHTS

The courtesy lights between the sun
visors and on the rear ceiling light
panel come on when you turn the
parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, press either of the
instrument panel brightness control
buttons (＋ or −) (see page 146 ).

201

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０３：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２０７

202

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０３：３７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２０８

Features
The climate control system in your
vehicle provides a comfortable
driving environment in all weather
conditions.

The climate control system and the
audio system have a voice control
feature.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ... 319
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 334
AcuraLink ..................................... 337
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ......... 354
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 375
Features

The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.

Climate Control System ................ 204
Climate Control Sensors ............... 212
Audio System ................................. 213
Playing the AM/FM Radio....... 214
AM/FM Radio Frequencies..... 224
AM/FM Radio Reception ......... 224
Adjusting the Sound .................. 226
Playing the XM Radio ............. 229
Operating the Disc Changer .... 236
Playing an iPod........................... 247
Playing a USB Flash Memory
Device ..................................... 256
Playing a Bluetooth Audio ....... 265
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 271
iPod Error Messages..................... 272
USB Flash Memory Device
Error Messages ......................... 273
Protecting Your Discs ................... 274
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 277
Remote Audio Controls................. 278
Radio Theft Protection.................. 280
Compass System ............................ 281
Voice Control Basics ................. 304
Setting the Clock ....................... 313
Security System ............................. 315
Cruise Control ................................ 316

203

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０３：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２０９

Climate Control System

DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BAR

PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BAR

FAN CONTROL WINDSHIELD
BUTTONS
DEFROSTER
BUTTON
AUTO
OFF
BUTTON BUTTON

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

RECIRCULATION
BUTTON

REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER/
MIRROR
HEATER
BUTTON

MODE
BUTTON

A/C
BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL
U.S. models
(Technology package model is shown)

204

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０３：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２１０

Climate Control System
Interface Dial
Many climate control functions can
still be controlled by standard
buttons, dials, and knobs, but some
functions can only be accessed using
the interface dial. The interface dial
has two parts, a knob and a selector.

The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection.

KNOB
ENTER

Voice Control System
The climate control system can also
be operated by voice control.
On models with navigation system

See the Navigation System manual
for complete details.
On models without navigation system

Refer to Voice Control Basics for
complete details (see page 304 ).

SELECTOR

The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.

205

2010 RL

Features

Personalization Setting
When you unlock the doors with
your remote, the driver’s ID (Driver
1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the
climate control settings are turned to
the respective mode automatically
when the ignition is turned to the
ON (II) position.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０４：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２１１

Climate Control System
Fan Control

Temperature Control Bars
To select the desired temperature,
push the temperature control bar up
or down.
To set the driver’s and passenger’s
temperature separately, push the
temperature control bar up or down
on the driver’s or passenger’s side.
The driver and passenger can each
set the temperature to the desired
setting.

Using the Fan Control Buttons

▲ button to increase
Press the
the fan speed and airflow. Press the
▼ button to decrease it.
Using the Interface Dial

Press the A/C button to view the
climate control display, then turn the
interface knob to increase or
decrease the fan speed and airflow.

206

2010 RL

Air Conditioning (A/C)
Press the A/C button to view the
climate control display. Pushing
ENTER on the interface selector
turns the air conditioning on and off.
You will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in
the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０４：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２１２

Climate Control System
Recirculation Button
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).

The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.

Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 147 ).
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.

Mode Control

Features

The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.

Windshield Defroster Button
This button turns the windshield
defroster on and off.
When you push this button, air flows
from the defroster vents at the base
of the windshield, and the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. When
the indicator in the button is on, the
passenger’s temperature cannot be
set separately from the driver’s.

You can select the vents air flows
from. Some air will flow from the
dashboard corner and side vents in
all modes.

Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
CONTINUED

207

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０４：２３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２１３

Climate Control System
Using the Mode Control Button

Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.

Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.

Using the Interface Dial

Press the A/C button to view the
climate control display, then push
the interface selector down. Select
any of the modes by turning the
interface knob.

Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
When
is selected, you can
increase or decrease the
temperature of airflow from the
dashboard vent for the driver’s side
and the passenger’s side without
changing the temperature of airflow
from the floor vent.
Push the interface selector right or
left, then turn the interface knob to
select the desired temperature.

208

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０４：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２１４

Climate Control System
Ventilation
The ventilation system draws in
outside air, circulates it through the
interior, then releases it through
vents near the rear window.

and fresh air mode.
1. Select
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control bar.
Using the A/C
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
70 ). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
air conditioning, and setting the fan
to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
CONTINUED

209

2010 RL

Features

1. Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
2. Make sure the A/C is off.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed.

Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０４：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２１５

Climate Control System
1. Press the A/C button to view the
climate control display.
2. Turn on the A/C by pushing
ENTER on the interface selector.
You will see A/C ON in the display.
3. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
.
4. Select
5. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
6. Set the fan to the desired speed by
turning the interface knob.

Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
1. Switch the fan on.
2. Turn on the air conditioning.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
. The system
2. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
to help clear the
4. Select
rear window.
5. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
When you switch to another mode
from
, the A/C setting
returns to the previous setting (on or
off). Select A/C, then press ENTER
on the interface selector to turn the
A/C off if it is on.

210

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０４：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２１６

Climate Control System

To clear the windshield faster, you
can close the dashboard corner vents
by rotating the wheel next to it. This
sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select the fresh
air mode to avoid fogging the
windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.

Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.

The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.

In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interior
temperature is independently
regulated for the driver and
passenger. If the driver’s side of the
vehicle is getting too much sun, the
system will adjust to a lower
temperature.

When you set the temperature to its
lower or its upper limit, the system
runs at full cooling or heating only. It
does not regulate the interior
temperature.

1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control bars.
You will see AUTO in the display
if the climate mode is selected.

When you change the fan speed, the
fan is taken out of AUTO mode and
starts to run at the selected speed.

211

2010 RL

Features

To Remove Exterior Frost or
Ice From the Windows
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
.
2. Select
3. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０４：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２１７

Climate Control Sensors
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
To Turn Everything Off
Press the OFF button. However, a
lack of airflow can cause the
windows to fog up. You should keep
the fan on at all times so stale air and
moisture do not build up in the
interior and cause fogging.

Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR

The climate control system has two
sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of
the dashboard, and a temperature
and humidity sensor next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.

212

2010 RL

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

０９／０４／０２ １９：０５：０９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２１８

Audio System
Interface Dial
Most audio system functions can still
be controlled by standard buttons,
dials, and knobs, but some functions
can only be accessed using the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts, a knob and a selector.
ENTER

Personalization Setting
When you unlock the doors with
your remote and turn the audio
system on, the driver’s ID (Driver 1
or Driver 2) is detected, and the
radio preset memory (see page 216 ),
the auto select preset memory (see
page 217 ), and the volume and
sound level settings (see page 226 )
are turned to the respective
memorized mode automatically.
Voice Control System
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control.
On models with navigation system

See the Navigation System manual
for complete details.

SELECTOR

On models without navigation system

Refer to Voice Control Basics for
complete details (see page 304 ).

213

2010 RL

Features

KNOB

The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０５：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２１９

Audio System
Playing the AM/FM Radio
UPPER DISPLAY

U.S. models (Technology package
model is shown) and Canadian models

Hawaiian models
FM BUTTON

POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB

AM/FM
BUTTON

POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB

AM BUTTON

SEEK BAR

TUNE BAR

SEEK BAR

TUNE BAR

SCAN
BUTTON

A.SEL
BUTTON

AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

PRESET BUTTONS

INTERFACE DIAL

214

2010 RL

PRESET BUTTONS

０９／０４／０２ １９：０５：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２２０

Audio System

STEREO ICON

BAND

To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the
preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT .

Features

The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Press the AUDIO button to
view the audio control display. Turn
the system on by pressing the
power/volume knob or the AM/FM
button (AM or FM button on
Hawaiian model). Adjust the volume
by turning the power/volume knob.

The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button (AM or FM
button Hawaiian models). You can
also change bands between FM1 and
FM2 by pushing the interface
selector up. Each time you push it up,
the band will change to FM1 or FM2.
On the FM bands, STEREO will be
shown on the navigation screen and
ST on the upper display, if the
station is broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction on AM is not
available.

TUNE ICON

TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the right side of the bar to
tune to a higher frequency, or the
left side to tune to a lower frequency.
To tune with the interface dial, push
the selector down, and turn the knob
to TUNE icon. Then press ENTER
on the selector, and turn the knob to
the desired frequency. To exit the
TUNE mode, press ENTER on the
selector, then push the selector up.
CONTINUED

215

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０５：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２２１

Audio System
SKIP (SEEK) − The skip (seek)
function searches up and down from
the current frequency to find a
station with a strong signal. To
activate it, press either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar, then release
it. You can also activate the skip
function (SEEK is displayed on the
screen) by pushing the interface
selector to the right or left.
SCAN ICON

SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it.
To scan with the interface dial, push
the selector down, and then push it
to the right. You will see SCAN
flashing on the screen and the upper
display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds a
strong signal, it will stop and play
that station for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the scan button again, or push
the interface selector to the right
again.

Preset − Each preset button or
preset icon can store one frequency
on AM and two frequencies on FM.
To store a preset memory location:

1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two sets of FM frequencies with
the preset buttons (on-screen
icons).
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Press the preset button, and hold
it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
it for more than 2 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.

216

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０５：４１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２２２

Audio System

A.SEL ICON

U.S. models (except Hawaiian) and
Canadian models

Hawaiian models

AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.

Press the A.SEL button. You will see
A.SEL on the upper display A.SEL on
the screen, and the system goes into
scan mode for several seconds. The
system stores the frequencies of six
AM and twelve FM stations in the
preset buttons.

To turn off auto select, press
ENTER on the interface selector
(press the A.SEL button) again. This
restores the presets you originally
set.

217

2010 RL

Features

Push the interface selector down to
scroll down the screen, highlight
A.SEL, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
A.SEL on the upper display and
A.SEL on the screen, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds.

You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０５：４７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２２３

Audio System
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).

Program Service (PS) Name Display

The program service name display
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. You can
turn this function on or off.

RDS INFO ON MESSAGE

To switch the function between on
and off, press and hold the DISP
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on
the upper display. If the station you
are listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.

218

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０５：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２２４

Audio System
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the audio screen
and the upper display continue to
show the frequency with the PS
name display function on.

Radio Data System (RDS) Category

RDS SEARCH ICON

With the FM band selected, you can
select the program type provided by
the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to
display the radio information on the
screen. Push down the selector on
the interface dial, then turn the knob
to select RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER to set your selection. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows:
ALL: All RDS category stations

CONTINUED

219

2010 RL

Features

When you turn off this function by
pressing the DISP button, the upper
display shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information

０９／０４／０２ １９：０６：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２２５

Audio System
RDS Program Search
RDS CATEGORY

RDS CATEGORY

Turn the selector to select an RDS
category. You can use the search or
scan function to find radio stations
on the selected RDS category by
pressing the selector to the right
repeatedly. Press ENTER to set your
selection. If you do nothing while the
RDS category is selected, the
selected category is canceled.

You can also select an RDS category
with the TUNE bar. Press either side
(
or
) of the TUNE bar to
display an RDS category in the
display. Select a category by pressing
either side of the bar.

220

2010 RL

This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press and release either side
(
or
) of the SEEK/SKIP
bar. You will also see the selected
RDS category name blinking in the
display while searching it. When the
system finds a station, the selected
RDS category name will be displayed
again for about 5 seconds in the
upper display.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０６：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２２６

Audio System
SEEK/SCAN ICON

Turn the knob to the desired RDS
category.

RDS CATEGORY LIST
SEEK is selected.

To activate RDS program search
with the interface dial, push the
AUDIO button to display the FM
radio information on the screen.
Push the selector down, and turn the
knob to select RDS SEARCH icon.
Press ENTER on the selector. The
screen shows you the RDS category
list.

CONTINUED

221

2010 RL

Features

While the RDS category is selected,
move the selector knob to the right
to select SEEK in the upper right
corner of the screen. Then press
ENTER to activate the seek function.

RDS Program SCAN

The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal in the selected
RDS category. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking in the display while
searching it. When the system finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０６：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２２７

Audio System
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.

SEEK/SCAN ICON

Turn the knob to the desired RDS
category.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the selector knob to the right
to select SCAN in the upper right
corner of the screen. Then press
ENTER to activate the scan function.

If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SCAN is selected.

To activate RDS program scan with
the interface dial, push the AUDIO
button to display the FM radio
information on the screen. Push the
selector down, and turn the knob to
select RDS SEARCH icon. Press
ENTER on the selector. The screen
shows you the RDS category list.

222

2010 RL

You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
PS name display function is off. In
this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a PS name.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０６：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２２８

Audio System
Radio Text Display

This function displays the radio text
information of the selected RDS
station.

TEXT INDICATOR

Features

If the selected RDS station has the
radio text information, you will see
the text indicator on the screen.

RADIO TEXT ICON

To activate radio text display, use
the interface dial. Push the selector
down, and turn the knob to select
RADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER on
the selector to enter the setting.

The display shows up to 64
characters on the selected RDS
station.

223

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０６：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２２９

Audio System
AM/FM Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’

AM/FM Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.

224

2010 RL

Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０６：３９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２３０

Audio System
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

Features

Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.

Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.

225

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０６：４６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２３１

Audio System
Adjusting the Sound
BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and
FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the AudioPilot and
Centerpoint features (when playing
a CD-DA) to on or off.
To adjust them, press the AUDIO
button, push the interface selector
down, and turn the interface knob to
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the
selector.
Select the mode you want to adjust
by pushing the interface selector up
or down, or by turning the interface
knob.

SOUND ICON

226

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０６：５１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２３２

Audio System
FADER/BALANCE − These
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
Fader adjusts the front-to-back
strength, while balance adjusts the
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader
and balance, select FADER or
BALANCE, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.

CENTER/SUBWOOFER − To
adjust the strength of the sound
from the center or subwoofer
speaker, select it and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.

CONTINUED

227

2010 RL

Features

BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass
and treble, select BASS or TREBLE,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The current setting is
shown on the display. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０６：５６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２３３

Audio System
AudioPilot − Bose AudioPilot
digital processing monitors sound
within the cabin, and helps
compensate for unwanted ambient
noise with no perceived change in
audio volume.
To set this feature on or off, select
AudioPilot, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. Turn the interface
knob to ON or OFF, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The ON or OFF indicator is shown
on the screen.

Centerpoint − Bose Centerpoint
signal processing processes stereo
and matrix surround recordings to
five independent channels, delivering
a multi-channel surround sound
experience, even from conventional
stereo discs.
To set this feature on or off, select
Centerpoint, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to ON or OFF, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. The ON or OFF indicator is
shown on the display.
NOTE: Centerpoint is only available
when listening to a CD (CD-DA).

228

2010 RL

AudioPilot and Centerpoint are
registered trade marks of the Bose
corporation.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０７：０３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２３４

Audio System
Playing the XM Radio
SATELLITE RADIO BUTTON
UPPER DISPLAY
TUNE
BUTTONS

CATEGORY
BUTTONS
SCAN
BUTTON

DISPLAY/
MODE
BUTTON

AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON

U.S. models
(Technology package model is shown) and Canadian models

INTERFACE DIAL

PRESET BUTTON

CONTINUED

229

2010 RL

Features

POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB

０９／０４／０３ １６：１３：４９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２３５

Audio System
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States, and Canada, except Hawaii
and Alaska. XM is a registered
trademark of Sirius XM Radio , Inc.
and, XM CANADA is a registered
business name of Canadian Satellite
Radio Inc.
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
also allows you to view channel and
category selections in the audio
display.

Operating the XM Radio

To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.

230

2010 RL

Push the AUDIO button to display
XM information on the screen. You
can operate the XM Radio system
with the interface dial.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０７：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２３６

Audio System

In the category mode, such as Jazz,
Rock, Classical, etc., you can
navigate through all of the channels
within that category. In the channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the audio
display changes in the following
sequence: channel name, channel
number, category, artist name, and
music title.

On the screen, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
TUNE − Press either side of the
TUNE bar to change channel
selections. Press the
side of the
bar for higher numbered channels
and the
side for lower
numbered channels. You can also
change channels with the interface
selector, push down the interface
selector to select AUDIO MENU,
then turn the interface knob to
choose TUNE and press ENTER on
the selector. Turn the interface knob
to the appropriate direction. In the
category mode, you can only select
channels within that category.

SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
SCAN, press the SCAN button. To
scan with the interface dial, scroll
down, and push interface selector to
the right. You will see SCAN on the
screen.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
SCAN button or push the interface
selector to the right again.
CATEGORY (
or
)−
Press either side of the bar to select
another category. You can also
change a category by pushing the
interface selector left or right.
CONTINUED

231

2010 RL

Features

MODE − To switch between the
category mode and channel mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes. The
CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is
displayed on the screen. To switch
the mode with the interface dial,
scroll down, select MODE, and press
ENTER on the selector.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０７：２８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２３７

Audio System

XM BAND

To store a channel:
button or scroll
1. Press the
up by pushing the interface
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2
will be shown on the display.
2. Use the TUNE or SCAN function
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.

Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.

3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
button or scroll
5. Press the
up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.

232

2010 RL

Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button to
tune to it.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０７：３８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２３８

Audio System
Note Function
If equipped

This function stores the sound
content played on the selected
satellite radio station with the
channel, category, name and title
information.
Features

To activate this function, press and
hold the
button for about 2
seconds while a song or passage
which you want to store is playing.
The function records for about 10
seconds, enough for you to identify
the selection when you play it back.
Once you store the recorded sound
file, you can replay it and confirm the
information. The system can store
up to 30 sound files. If you continue
to store more files, the oldest one
will be deleted each time you add
new file.

To replay and see the stored file,
press the AUDIO button to select
the audio display on the navigation
screen.
Push down the selector knob to
display the audio menu. Turn the
selector knob to select NOTE, then
press ENTER.

Turn the selector knob to select a
sound file, then press ENTER. The
display shows the category, name
and title information of the selected
file.
To delete a file, select it by turning
the selector knob, then push it to the
right. Select ‘‘Delete All’’ or ‘‘Delete
Selected Item,’’ then press ENTER.
CONTINUED

233

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０７：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２３９

Audio System

Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.

Signal weaker in
these areas.

The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
Operation in Alaska

Because XM is unavailable in Alaska,
the XM hardware equipped with
your vehicle cannot be operated.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

234

2010 RL

０９／０４／０３ １６：１４：０２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２４０

Audio System
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:

There may be other geographic
situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.

and your credit card number. To get
your radio I.D. number, press the
side of the TUNE bar until ‘‘0’’
appears in the display. Your I.D. will
appear in the display.

Receiving XM Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the
ON (II) position, push the power/
volume knob to turn on the audio
system, and press the
button.
A variety of music types and styles
will play.

After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.

If you decide to purchase XM radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM CANADA at www.xmradio.ca, or
at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to
give them your radio I.D. number

While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,
and you’ll be able to listen to XM
radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from the activation request. If the
service has not been activated after
36 hours, contact XM Radio.

235

2010 RL

Features

Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０８：０３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２４１

Audio System
Operating the Disc Changer
UPPER DISPLAY

Hawaiian models

U.S. models (Technology package
model is shown) and Canadian models
LOAD
BUTTON
DISC/AUX
BUTTON
SKIP BAR

EJECT
BUTTON

SCAN
BUTTON

POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB

TUNE BAR

LOAD
BUTTON
DISC/AUX
BUTTON
SKIP BAR

EJECT
BUTTON

TUNE BAR
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB

SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON

AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL

INTERFACE DIAL

236

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０８：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２４２

Audio System
Your vehicle’s audio system has an
in-dash disc changer with the same
controls used for the radio. To
operate the disc changer, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position.

The changer can also play MP3 or
WMA format (see page 243 ).

The disc changer can play these disc
formats:
CD (CD-DA)
CD-R/RW
DVD-A
DTSTM

The changer cannot play DVD-V or
DVD-R/RW formats.

DVD-A discs not meeting DVD
verification standards may not be
playable.

‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’
are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.

The disc packages or jackets should
have one of these marks.

237

2010 RL

Features

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０８：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２４３

Audio System
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent ＃’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending. DTS and DTS
Digital Surround are registered
trademarks and the DTS logos and
Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

Loading Discs in the Changer
To load multiple discs in one
operation:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button
on the changer unit until you hear
a beep. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ on
the upper display, and the disc
load indicator turns red and starts
blinking.
2. Insert the disc into the disc slot
when the disc load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
upper display at the same time.
Insert it only halfway; the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.
You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ on the upper
display, and the disc load indicator
turns red again and blinks as the
disc is loaded.
3. When the disc load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears on the
upper display again, insert the
next disc in the slot.

238

2010 RL

Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all
six positions are loaded. If you are
not loading all six positions, press
the LOAD button again after the
last disc has loaded.
If you stop loading discs before all
six positions are filled, the system
will wait for 15 seconds, stop the load
operation, and begin playing the last
disc loaded.
To load a single disc:
1. Press and release the LOAD
button on the changer unit. You
will see ‘‘BUSY’’ on the upper
display, and the disc load indicator
turns red and starts blinking.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０８：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２４４

Audio System
You can also select the empty
position by pressing the appropriate
preset button.

2. Insert a disc into the disc slot
when the disc load indicator turns
green, and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears on
the upper display at the same time.
Insert the disc only about halfway;
the drive will pull it in the rest of
the way. You will see the disc
number blinking on the upper
display, and the disc load indicator
turns red again and blinks as the
disc is loaded.

You can load a disc(s) in any mode
(AM, FM, XM, or AUX) if you do not
select an empty position.

EMPTY POSITION

Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.

You can load a disc into an empty
position while a disc is playing. Press
the AUDIO button to view the audio
control display. Select the empty
position (‘‘No Disc’’ is shown on the
audio control display) by rotating the
interface dial. Then press ENTER on
the selector to enter your selection.
The current disc stops playing and
starts the loading sequence. The disc
just loaded will play.

239

2010 RL

Features

You cannot select the empty position
if there is no disc in the changer.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０８：３９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２４５

Audio System
To Play a Disc
Select the changer by pressing the
DISC/AUX button. The system will
begin playing the last selected disc in
the disc changer. You will see the
current disc position highlighted.
To select a different disc, press the
corresponding number on the preset
buttons, or turn the interface knob to
highlight the desired disc, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.

When playing a CD (CD-DA) with
CD-TEXT, the audio control display
shows the disc number, album name,
track number, and elapsed time.
When playing a CD without this
information, the number of the disc
and track playing and the elapsed
time are shown on the audio control
display.
To Change Tracks
Each time you press and release the
side of the skip bar or push the
interface selector to the right, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the
side of the skip
bar or push the interface selector to
the left to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
the
side or push the interface
selector to the left again to skip to
the previous track. To move rapidly
within a track, press and hold either
side of the skip bar.

240

2010 RL

To Choose a Track

CURRENT TRACK

You can also choose a track directly
from a track list. Press ENTER on
the interface selector, and the track
list screen will be shown. If there are
no track names, track numbers are
displayed. You will see the current
track is highlighted. Turn the
interface knob to select the desired
track, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０８：４５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２４６

Audio System
To exit the track list display, press
the AUDIO button, or push the
interface selector to the left.

If you don’t, the system advances to
the next track, plays about 10
seconds of it, and continues through
the rest of the tracks the same way.

Disc Scan
When you press and hold the SCAN
button until you hear a beep or scroll
down and push the interface selector
to the right, the first track of the
current disc plays for about 10
seconds. You will see SCAN next to
DISC on the screen and SCAN on
the upper display. To hear the rest of
the disc, press the SCAN button or
push the interface selector to the
right again within 10 seconds.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
of it, and continues through the rest
of the discs the same way. When the
system reaches the last disc, DISC
SCAN is canceled, and the disc plays
normally.

241

2010 RL

Features

Track Scan
When you press the SCAN button or
scroll down and push the interface
selector to the left, the next track of
the current track plays for about 10
seconds. You will see SCAN next to
TRACK on the screen and SCAN on
the upper display. To hear the rest of
the track, press the SCAN button or
push the interface selector to the left
again within 10 seconds.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０８：５０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２４７

Audio System
Track Repeat
To replay the current track
continuously, use the interface
selector to scroll down, select
TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER
on the interface selector. As a
reminder, you will see REPEAT next
to TRACK on the screen. To turn
this feature off, highlight TRACK
REPEAT (if not already highlighted),
and press ENTER on the interface
selector again.

Disc Repeat
To replay the current disc
continuously, use the interface
selector to scroll down, select DISC
REPEAT, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. As a reminder,
you will see REPEAT next to DISC
on the screen. To turn this feature
off, highlight DISC REPEAT (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.

242

2010 RL

Random Play
To play the tracks of the current disc
in random order, use the interface
selector to scroll down, select
TRACK RANDOM, and press
ENTER on the interface selector. As
a reminder, you will see RANDOM
next to TRACK on the screen. To
turn this feature off, highlight
TRACK RANDOM (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０９：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２４８

Audio System
To Pause a Disc
To pause a disc, press the
corresponding number of the
current disc on the preset buttons.
To play the disc again, press the
preset button again.

＊: AM or FM button on Hawaiian
models.
Playing a DVD-A Disc
You can play a DVD-A disc in the
disc changer. The disc controls are
same as previously described.

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
The changer plays MP3/WMA discs
in recorded order. Maximum
playable file layers are 8, and total
playable tracks are 255. If your disc
has a complex structure, the changer
takes some time to read the disc
before beginning play.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session

CONTINUED

243

2010 RL

Features

To Stop Playing a Disc
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.

To take the system out of disc mode,
press the AM/FM＊ button, the
DISC/AUX button, or the XM button
(If equipped). The system will switch
to the function associated with the
button you pressed. If you pressed
the DISC/AUX button, any auxiliary
input device attached to the system
will be selected. To return to disc
mode, press the DISC/AUX button
again and play will continue at the
same point it left off.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０９：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２４９

Audio System
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the
disc controls previously described,
along with the following information.

Name Display Function
All models except Hawaiian

Each time you press the DISP/
MODE button while playing a CD
(CD-DA), the upper display changes
from album name, to track name, to
artist name, and then to normal
display. If the disc was not recorded
with CD-TEXT, ‘‘NO INFO’’ will be
shown on the upper display.
When playing a CD compressed in
MP3/WMA format, the display
changes from folder name, to file
name, to track tag, to artist tag, to
album tag, and then to normal
display each time you press the
DISP/MODE button. If the disc was
not recorded with this information,
‘‘NO INFO’’ will be shown on the
upper display.

244

2010 RL

If the title is too long, it will not show
all at once. Press and hold the DISP/
MODE button, and the rest of the
title will show on the upper display.
You will also see the album and track
name (CD-TEXT), or the folder and
file name (MP3/WMA) under these
conditions:
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
Each time a new track, file, or
folder plays.

０９／０４／０２ １９：０９：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２５０

Audio System

CURRENT FOLDER

Folder Repeat (MP3/WMA
Mode)

Folder Random (MP3/WMA
Mode)

Features

To enter the FOLDER LIST, press
ENTER on the selector, select a
folder by turning the interface knob,
then press ENTER on the selector. If
you want to move to the parent
folder, push the selector up. If there
are no folder names, ‘‘No Title’’ is
displayed. You will see the current
folder highlighted.

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

This feature, when activated, replays
all files in the selected folder. To
activate folder repeat mode, select
FOLDER REPEAT by interface
knob, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
REPEAT next to FOLDER on the
screen. To turn this feature off,
highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

This feature, when activated, plays
all files in the current folder in
random order. To activate folder
random play, select FOLDER
RANDOM by interface knob, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. You will see RANDOM
next to FOLDER on the screen. To
turn this feature off, highlight
FOLDER RANDOM (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.

245

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０９：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２５１

Audio System
Removing Discs from the
Changer
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press and release the eject
(
) button. You will see
‘‘EJECT’’ on the upper display. When
you remove the disc from the slot,
the system begins the load sequence
so you can load another disc in that
position. If you do not load another
disc within 15 seconds, the system
selects the previous mode [AM, FM1,
FM2, or XM Radio (all models
except Hawaiian models)].
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds and put the
disc changer in pause mode. To
begin playing the disc, press the
DISC/AUX button.

To remove a different disc from the
changer, first select it by pressing
the corresponding number on the
preset button or turning the
interface knob, and pressing ENTER
on the interface selector. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button.
When you press the eject button
while listening to the radio, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the discs from the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button.

246

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０９：３２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２５２

Audio System
Playing an iPod
DISC/AUX BUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

Features

POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR

DISP
BUTTON

AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL
U.S. Technology package model and Canadian models are shown

247

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０９：３９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２５３

Audio System
To Play an iPod
This audio system can operate the
audio files on the iPod with the
same controls used for the in-dash
disc changer. To play an iPod,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment by using
your dock connector, then press the
DISC/AUX button. The ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. The iPod will
also be recharged with the ignition
switch in these positions.

The system will only play songs
stored on the iPod with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Voice Control System

You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
control buttons, but cannot operate
the play mode functions.

iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
Model
iPod Classic
5th Gen.
(2005 or later)
iPod Classic
(2007 or later)
iPod nano
iPod nano 2nd
generation
iPod nano 3rd
generation
iPod touch
iPhone

Software
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more

Use only compatible iPods with the
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.

248

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０９：５０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２５４

Audio System
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.

Connecting an iPod
USB ADAPTER CABLE

Do not keep the iPod in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.

USB ADAPTER
CABLE
Features

Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
USB CONNECTOR

We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.

1. Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.

DOCK CONNECTOR

2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.

CONTINUED

249

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：０９：５６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２５５

Audio System

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

When the iPod is connected and the
iPod mode is selected on the audio
display, the USB and iPod indicators
are shown in the display. After
loading, you will see the Acura logo＊
on the iPod. That means you can
only operate your iPod using the
vehicle’s audio unit.

＊: It may take a few minutes for
the Acura logo to display on the
iPod. If the display does not
change, this function is not
supported on your iPod model
or firmware.
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at www.apple.com/
ipod.

250

2010 RL

The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are
displayed in the upper display.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the artist, album and track (file)
names on the navigation screen.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１０：０５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２５６

Audio System
To Change or Select Files

To Select a File from iPod Menu

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.

To move rapidly forward or
backward within a track, press and
hold the
/
or
/
button.

Features

SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
You can also change files with the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO
button to show the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push the selector to the right side to
skip forward and to the left side to
skip backward.

You can also select a file from any of
the iPod menus: playlists, artists,
albums and songs, by using the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO
button to display the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push up the interface selector to
display the iPod menu. Turn the
knob on the interface dial to select a
desired list.
CONTINUED

251

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１０：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２５７

Audio System
If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available files
on the selected list are played.

To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

Press the AUDIO button to go back
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio control display on the screen.

Push down the selector.

You can select any type of repeat and
random mode on the audio menu.
Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control screen, then push
down the selector to display the
audio menu. Turn the knob on the
interface dial to select an audio
mode: repeat, album random, and
track random. Press ENTER to set
your selection.

Push ENTER on the selector to
display the items on that list, then
turn the knob on the interface dial to
select a desired list. Pushing the
selector up or down moves a
selection to the top or bottom of the
screen items. Press ENTER to set
your selection.

252

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１０：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２５８

Audio System
To cancel the selected mode, press
ENTER again while the highlighted
mode is selected on the audio control
display.

REPEAT − This feature
continuously plays a file.
To turn it off, press ENTER again.
Pressing either side of the SKIP
bar changes the file while keeping
the repeat feature.

CONTINUED

253

2010 RL

Features

TRACK RANDOM − This feature
plays all available files from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. You will see
TRACK RANDOM on the screen.
To turn it off, have this mode
highlighted and press ENTER again.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１０：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２５９

Audio System
To turn it off, have this mode
highlighted and press ENTER again.
You can also select another list from
the iPod menu while keeping the
random function.
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary
on models or versions. Some
functions may not be available on
the vehicle’s audio system.
ALBUM RANDOM − This feature
plays all available albums from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. The files in each
album are played in the recorded
order. You will see ALBUM
RANDOM on the screen.

254

2010 RL

To Stop Playing Your iPod
All models except Hawaiian

To play the radio, press the AM/FM
or XM button. Press the DISC/AUX
button to switch to the disc mode (if
a disc is loaded). Press the DISC/
AUX button to switch the audio
mode between the Bluetooth audio
and iPod.
Hawaiian models

To play the radio, press the AM or
FM button. Press the DISC/AUX
button to switch to the disc mode (if
a disc is loaded). Press the DISC/
AUX button to switch the audio
mode between the Bluetooth audio
and iPod.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１０：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２６０

Audio System
Disconnecting an iPod

If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.

iPod Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
upper display, see page 272 .

Features

You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message＊ in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in the
iPod display before you disconnect it.
Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect
the dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
＊: The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the upper display and
the audio screen (if selected) show
NO DATA.

255

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１０：３７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２６１

Audio System
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device

DISC/AUX BUTTON
UPPER DISPLAY
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR

DISPLAY
BUTTON

AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL
U.S. Technology package model and Canadian models are shown

256

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１０：４８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２６２

Audio System

The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC＊ formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash
memory device is playing. The USB
flash memory device limit is up to
700 folders or up to 65535 files.

The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher. Some digital audio players
may be compatible as well.

Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.

Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.

We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.

NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.

＊: Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.

Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
Voice Control System

You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
control buttons, but cannot operate
the play mode functions.
CONTINUED

257

2010 RL

Features

To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can operate the
audio files from a USB flash memory
device with the same controls used
for the in-dash disc changer. To play
a USB flash memory device, connect
it to the USB adapter cable in the
console compartment, then press the
DISC/AUX button. The ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１１：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２６３

Audio System
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps
(MPEG1)
−Supported standards:
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
−Partition: Top partition only
−Maximum layers: 8

The specifications for compatible
AAC files are:
−Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
−Bitrate:
48−320 kbps
−Supported standards:
MPEG4/AAC LC
MPEG2/AAC LC
−Partition: Top partition only
−Maximum layers: 8

The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Bitrate:
48−320/VBR kbps (Max 384)
−Supported standards:
WMA version 7/8/9
−Partition: Top partition only
−Maximum layers: 8

258

2010 RL

Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１１：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２６４

Audio System
names, and the elapsed time in the
navigation screen.

Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
USB ADAPTER CABLE

To Change or Select Files

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.

1. Unclip the USB connector by
pivoting it, and pull out the USB
adapter cable in the console
compartment.

2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
When the USB flash memory device
is connected and the USB mode is
selected on the audio system, the
USB indicator is shown in the upper
display. It also shows the folder and
file numbers. Pressing the AUDIO
button displays the folder and file

To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
/
or
/
button.

CONTINUED

259

2010 RL

Features

USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR

０９／０４／０２ １９：１１：１７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２６５

Audio System
You can also change files with the
interface dial. Press the AUDIO
button to show the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push the selector knob to the right
side to skip to the beginning of the
next file, and to the left side to skip
to the beginning of the current file.
Pushing it to the left again skips to
the beginning of the previous file.
SKIP
DIRECTION

To Select a File from Folder and File
Lists

SKIP
DIRECTION

You can also select a folder or file
from the list by using the interface
dial. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio control display on the
navigation screen.

260

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１１：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２６６

Audio System
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:

Features

Push up the selector on the interface
dial to switch the display to the
folder list, then turn the knob on the
interface dial to select a folder.

Press ENTER to change the display
to the file list, then turn the knob on
the interface dial to select a file.
Press ENTER to set your selection.
To go back to the normal playing
display, press the AUDIO button.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio mode display.

You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes on the audio
menu screen. Press the AUDIO
button to show the audio control
display on the navigation screen.
Push down the selector on the
interface dial to display the audio
menu items.
CONTINUED

261

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１１：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２６７

Audio System
To cancel the selected mode, push
down the selector to display the
audio menu on the audio control
display. Turn the knob on the
interface dial to select the
highlighted play mode, then press
ENTER to turn off that selected
mode.

FOLDER REPEAT − This feature
replays all the files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
TRACK REPEAT − This feature
continuously plays a file. Pressing
either side of the SKIP bar also turns
off this feature.
FOLDER RANDOM − This
feature plays the files in the selected
folder in random order.
TRACK RANDOM − This feature
plays all the files in random order.

Turn the knob on the interface dial
to select a play mode: folder random,
track random, folder repeat, track
repeat. Press ENTER to set your
selection.

262

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１１：３６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２６８

Audio System
FOLDER SCAN − This function
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature, push
the selector to the right repeatedly.
You will see FOLDER SCAN on the
screen. You will also see SCAN on
the upper display and the folder
number blinking. You will get a 10
second sampling each first file in the
folder(s). Push the selector
repeatedly to get out of the scan
mode. The system plays the last file
sampled.

You can also select the folder scan
feature with the SCAN button on the
control panel. Press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly.
Press and hold the SCAN button to
get out of the folder scan mode and
play the last file sampled.
Features

TRACK SCAN − This function
samples all files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the scan feature, push
the selector to the right. You will see
TRACK SCAN on the screen. You
will also see SCAN on the upper
display and the file number blinking.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each file in the folder. Push the
selector repeatedly to get out of the
scan mode. The system plays the last
file sampled.
You can also select the scan feature
with the SCAN button on the control
panel.
Press and release the SCAN button.
Press and hold the SCAN button to
get out of the scan mode and play
the last file sampled.

263

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１１：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２６９

Audio System
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device

Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device

All models except Hawaiian

You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Make sure to follow
the USB flash memory device’s
instructions when you remove it.

To play the radio, press the AM or
FM button. Press the DISC/AUX
button to switch to the disc mode (if
a disc is loaded). Press the DISC/
AUX button to switch the audio
mode between the USB mode and
Bluetooth audio.

When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the upper display and the audio
screen (if selected) show NO DATA.

264

2010 RL

USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
If you see an error message in the
upper display, see page 273 .

０９／０４／０２ １９：１１：４９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２７０

Audio System
Playing Bluetooth Audio
DISC/AUX BUTTON
UPPER DISPLAY

SKIP BAR

DISP
BUTTON

AUDIO
BUTTON

AUDIO CONTROL DISPLAY
INTERFACE DIAL

CONTINUED

265

2010 RL

Features

POWER/VOLUME
KNOB

０９／０４／０３ １６：１４：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２７１

Audio System
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Bluetooth Audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming
audio from your Bluetooth Audio
compatible phone. This function is
only available on phones that are
paired and linked to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system (see page 360 ).
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones
with streaming audio capabilities are
compatible with the system. You can
find an approved phone by visiting
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by
calling the HandsFreeLink
consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
1-866-78-ACURA.
NOTE: In some states it may be
illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.

To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

Once a device is linked, the name of
the device will appear on the screen.
Pressing the DISP button switches
the upper display between the
Bluetooth Audio and the device
name.
If more than one phone is paired to
the HFL system, there will be delay
before the system begins to play.
To begin to play the audio files, you
may need to operate your phone.
Follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.

Make sure that your phone is paired
and linked to HFL.
Press the DISC/AUX button＊. When
the phone is recognized, you will see
the Bluetooth Audio message on the
upper display and the audio control
display on the navigation screen (if
selected), and the system begins to
play.

266

2010 RL

＊: If an iPod, USB flash memory
device or audio unit connected
to the auxiliary input jack was
selected as the last mode, you
will see iPod, USB or AUX in the
upper display and the audio
control display on the navigation
screen (if selected). Push the
DISC/AUX button again to play
audio files from your Bluetooth
Audio phone.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１２：０８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２７２

Audio System
In the following conditions, the
display shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’
message after pressing the preset 1
button.

If your Bluetooth Audio compatible
phone does not operate as described,
make sure it is an Acura approved
phone. To find out if your phone is
approved, go to www.acura.com/
handsfreelink (in Canada, visit www.
acura.ca.), or call the
HandsFreeLink client support at
(888) 528-7876.

To skip a file

Press the
side of the SKIP bar
to skip forward to the next file, and
press the
side to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Push the
side again to skip to
the previous file.

Features

The phone is not linked to HFL.
The phone is not turned on.
The phone is not in the vehicle.
Your phone is not set to play audio
files.

Voice Control System

You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
control buttons, but cannot operate
the play mode functions.

You can also operate the skip
function with the interface dial on
the audio control display of the
navigation screen. Push the AUDIO
button. Each time you push the
selector on the interface dial to the
right, the system skips forward to
the beginning of the next file. Push it
to the left to skip backward to the
beginning to the current file. Push
the selector to the left again to skip
to the previous file.
CONTINUED

267

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１２：１６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２７３

Audio System
To change sound settings

To pause or resume a file

Turn the knob on the interface dial
to switch the setting between the
resume/pause mode and the sound
mode. Select RESUME/PAUSE,
then press ENTER to set your
selection. Each time you press
ENTER, the system switches
between the resume mode and pause
mode.
NOTE: The pause function may not
work on some types of files.

Press the AUDIO button, then push
down the selector to display the
audio menu. Turn the knob to switch
the setting between the resume/
pause mode and the sound mode.
Select SOUND, then press ENTER
to set your selection.

The resume/pause mode can stop
playing a file temporarily.

Turn the knob to your liking (see
page 226 for more sound setting
information).

268

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１２：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２７４

Audio System
To switch to HFL mode

If you receive a call when the
Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the
Talk button on the steering wheel.
The screen and the upper display
switch to the HFL mode (see page
354 ).

If you receive a call while the system
is in the pause mode, the mode will
be canceled and Bluetooth Audio
will continue to play.

Select any other audio mode by
pressing a button; FM/AM, XM or
DISC/AUX (if a disc is loaded), on
the audio control panel or press the
mode button on the steering wheel
repeatedly to select another audio
mode. If an iPod or USB flash
memory device is connected to the
USB adapter cable or audio unit is
connected to AUX jack, pressing the
AUX button also changes a mode.

Hawaiian models

Select any other audio mode by
pressing a button; FM, AM or DISC
(if a disc is loaded), on the audio
control panel or press the mode
button on the steering wheel
repeatedly to select another audio
mode. If an iPod or USB flash
memory device is connected to the
USB adapter cable or audio unit is
connected to AUX jack, pressing the
DISC/AUX button also changes a
mode.
Switching to another mode pauses
the music playing from your phone.

CONTINUED

269

2010 RL

Features

After ending the call, press the HFL
Back button to go back to the
Bluetooth Audio mode.

To turn off the Bluetooth Audio
mode
All models except Hawaiian

０９／０４／０２ １９：１２：２８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２７５

Audio System
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

270

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１２：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２７６

Disc Changer Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.

Error
Message

Cause
FOCUS Error

CHECK DISC
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
MANUAL
PUSH EJECT

Eject Error

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 275). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.

The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

271

2010 RL

Features

If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 275 .

Solution

０９／０４／０２ １９：１２：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２７７

iPod Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
upper display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.

Error
Message

Cause

USB ERROR

USB ROM error

BAD DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
MANUAL

NO SONG

No files in iPod

UNSUPPORTED
iPod RETRY

Abnormal power source

Use of unsupported
device
Recognition failure of
iPod

272

2010 RL

Solution
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Appears when the overcurrent protection
feature of the system stops supplying power to
USB because an incompatible device is
connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
AAC files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported device is
connected. Disconnect the device.
Appears when the system does not
acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１２：４５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２７８

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
upper display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error
Message

Cause

USB ERROR

USB ROM error

Abnormal power source

UNPLAYABLE

Use of unsupported files

No files in USB flash
memory device

NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

Use of unsupported USB
flash memory device

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Appears when the overcurrent protection
feature of the system stops supplying power to
USB because an incompatible device is
connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the files in the USB flash
memory device are DRM or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for a few
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files
in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
connected. See page 258 for the specification
information for the USB flash memory device.
If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.

273

2010 RL

Features

BAD DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
MANUAL

Solution

０９／０４／０２ １９：１２：５４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２７９

Protecting Your Discs
General Information
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the disc
changer.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or oddshaped discs may jam in the drive
or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.

Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc changer.

274

2010 RL

Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felttip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１３：０５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２８０

Protecting Your Discs

Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:

1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Bubbled/
Wrinkled

With Label/
Sticker

2. Damaged discs

Chipped/
Cracked

Using Printer
Label Kit

Sealed

With Plastic
Ring

3. Poor quality discs

Warped

Burrs

CONTINUED

275

2010 RL

Features

Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１３：１６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２８１

Protecting Your Discs
4. Small, irregular shaped discs

3-inch (8-cm) CD

5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs

Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.

Can Shape

Arrow Shape

276

2010 RL

Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.

Audio unit may not play the
following formats.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１３：２１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２８２

Auxiliary Input Jack

Features

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

The auxiliary input jack is inside the
console compartment. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories.

When you plug in a mini-jack cable
between a compatible audio unit and
the jack, you will see AUX in the
display and the system automatically
switches to AUX mode.

277

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１３：２７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２８３

Remote Audio Controls

MODE
BUTTON
VOL
BUTTON
CH
BUTTON

Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.

The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
or disc (if a disc(s) is loaded). On
models with XM Radio, you can also
select XM1 and XM2. If an iPod or a
USB flash memory device is plugged
into the system, you can also select
AUX.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (＋) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
station.
To activate the seek function, press
and hold the top (＋) or bottom (−)
of the CH button until you hear a
beep. The system searches up or
down from the current frequency to
find a station with a strong signal.

278

2010 RL

If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track/file (in MP3/WMA mode)
each time you press the top (＋) of
the CH button. Press the bottom
(−) to return to the beginning of the
current track/file. Press it again to
return to the previous track/file.
To select a different disc (folder in
MP3/WMA mode), press and hold
the top (＋) or bottom (−) of the
CH button until you hear a beep.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１３：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２８４

Remote Audio Controls
On all models except Hawaiian

Features

If you are listening to XM Radio, use
the CH button to change channels.
Each time you press the top (＋) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset channel. Press the
bottom (−) to go back to the
previous preset channel.
To select a different channel of the
category you are listening to, press
and hold the top (＋) or bottom (−)
of the CH button until you hear a
beep.

279

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１３：３８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２８５

Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system may
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code with
the preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from the five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
You should have received a radio
code card that lists your audio
system’s code and serial numbers. It
is best to store this card in a safe
place at home. In addition, you
should write the audio system’s
serial number in this owner’s manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
you will see ‘‘
’’ in the upper
display the next time you turn on the
system. Use the preset buttons to
enter the code. The code is located
on the radio code card included in
your owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have 10 tries to
enter the correct code.
If the code card is lost, your dealer
can access your code with your
radio’s serial number. To access the
serial number, turn the radio on. It
must display ‘‘
’’, then turn
the radio off. Push and hold the
preset 1 and preset 6 buttons, then

280

2010 RL

push the power/volume knob. The
serial number will appear in two sets
of four digits.
The system will retain your AM and
FM presets even if power is
disconnected.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１３：４８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２８６

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

UPPER
DISPLAY

MENU
BUTTON

COMPASS
BUTTON

System Controls
The controls for the compass system
are on the center console panel.
These controls are also used to
operate the climate control system
(see page 204 ) and the audio system
(see page 214 ).
Compass Button

Press this button to display the
Compass screen (see page 286 ).
CANCEL
BUTTON

TRIP
BUTTON
SET UP
BUTTON

(Display mode)
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL

Menu Button

Press this button to display the Main
Menu screen (see page 287 ) for the
trip computer, calendar, calculator,
and voice command Help.
CONTINUED

281

2010 RL

Features

SCREEN

The compass system in your vehicle
contains several convenient features,
including a direction and elevation
finder, a calendar reminder for
important events, a calculator, and a
trip computer to help you track your
mileage and fuel economy.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１４：０２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２８７

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Trip Button

Press this button to display the Trip
Computer screen (see page 288 ).

Interface Dial
KNOB
ENTER

select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector in
(ENTER) to go to that selection.

Set Up Button

Press the button to display the set up
screen (see page 293 ) to change and
update information in the system.

In almost all cases, you can enter a
selection into the system by pushing
in on the interface selector.

(Display Mode) Button

This button switches the display
between day mode, night mode, and
off (see page 298 ).
Cancel Button

Press this button to cancel the
current screen and return to the
previous screen.

Screen

All selections and instructions are
displayed on the screen.
SELECTOR

Most functions of the compass
system can be accessed with the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts: a knob and a selector.
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to

282

2010 RL

Clean the screen with a soft damp
cloth. You may use a mild cleanser
intended for use on liquid crystal
displays (LCDs). Harsher chemicals
may damage the screen.
Upper Display

Shows the radio band, frequency,
volume, the climate control status,
and the time.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１４：１２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２８８

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
System Start-up
Throughout the compass system
section, the icon ‘‘
’’ is used to
indicate features that are dependent
on the ‘‘Driver number’’ as displayed
on the multi-information display
‘‘Welcome’’ display.

The first screen to appear is the
compass system globe screen. The
screen then changes to the
disclaimer screen:

Features

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the compass
system to boots up within a few
seconds.
Please read the disclaimer carefully
before you continue. To go to the
compass screen, select OK by
pushing in the interface selector.
NOTE:
The OK button does not appear
immediately. It appears after the
system is loaded. The OK
command cannot be activated by
voice.
CONTINUED

283

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１４：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２８９

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
If you select OK , the reminder will
not show up again. If you wish to
have the reminder show up again
later in the day, select Remind
Later and push in on the interface
selector.

If you do not push in on the
interface selector, the screen will
go dark after 30 seconds. To return
to the disclaimer screen, press any
compass or voice control button.
NOTE: If you do not select OK , and
then enter the Set up or Trip
computer screens, some items are
not available, and will show up as
darkened buttons (grayed out).

If you press the CANCEL button, the
message will be displayed the next
time you start the vehicle.

If any calendar reminders were
previously entered, the calendar
reminder screen is displayed next.
The calendar reminder screen
remains displayed until you select
OK , Remind Later or press the
CANCEL button.

284

2010 RL

NOTE: The system will display the
current message and any older or
previously unread messages, with
the newest message listed first.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１４：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２９０

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

NOTE: If both remotes come within
range simultaneously, the
‘‘Welcome’’ display may be
unpredictable.

When the keyless access remote is
deliberately ‘‘unlinked,’’ (as when
giving the key to a valet) the multiinformation display will display
‘‘Welcome.’’ Then the following
occurs:

For information on ‘‘linking’’ and
‘‘unlinking’’ the keyless access
remotes, see page 173 .

The calendar feature is not
selectable (buttons grayed out).

Features

Keyless Memory SettingsTM
The vehicle ‘‘senses’’ the driver
number, based on which keyless
remote is used to unlock the vehicle.
If two drivers with remotes approach
the vehicle at the same time, the
welcome display and related settings
are based on which remote the
vehicle first ‘‘senses.’’

Setup values (like volume,
brightness, etc.) can be changed
but are not remembered the next
time you restart the vehicle.

The compass system uses the driver
number (as recognized by the multiinformation display) to personalize
the compass system. For example, if
Driver 1 unlocks the vehicle, the
‘‘Driver 1’’ personal address book
and other navigation settings are
automatically loaded when the
vehicle is started. There is no way to
change from one driver’s settings to
another while driving.

285

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１４：３３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２９１

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
The Compass Screen

You can see the current latitude,
longitude, and elevation at any time
when you press the COMPASS
button or say ‘‘Display map guide.’’
The date and time is also displayed.

If the system does not receive the
elevation information, the display
shows only current latitude and
longitude.

NOTE: If the battery is disconnected
or the fuse for the compass system
is removed, the system may require
GPS initialization (see page 299 ).

286

2010 RL

If the GPS reception is low, the
display shows a ‘‘Low GPS
reception’’ message.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１４：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２９２

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Voice Command Help

When you say ‘‘Display menu’’ or
press the MENU button, the display
changes to the Main menu screen.
To select a menu item, turn the
interface knob to highlight the item,
then press the interface selector.

The voice command help screen
displays several topics that help you
to understand your vehicle’s voice
control system. To go to the voice
command help screen, say or select
‘‘Voice command help.’’ Then select
a topic by saying either the topic
name or its line number.

Features

Main Menu

NOTE: If some items appear grayed
out and cannot be selected, the
vehicle does not sense the driver’s
ID of the remote (see page 173 ).

To use the voice command tutorial,
say or select ‘‘Getting started.’’ The
display changes to the Getting
started screen.
Select the line number of the tutorial
you want to view, and the tutorial will
automatically be read out. To stop
the system from reading the tutorial,
move the interface knob to the right.
CONTINUED

287

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１４：４９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２９３

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
For a listing of all voice commands,
see Voice Command Index on page
307 .

When you make a selection (such as
Navigation general command help),
you will see the help commands that
can be used with the voice control.
To have the system read the list, say
‘‘Read list,’’ or select
by
moving the interface selector to the
right, and the system will read the
list to you.

Trip Computer

The trip computer screens display
the trip information from the multiinformation display in the gauge
assembly.
To go to the trip computer, say ‘‘Trip
Computer,’’ select Trip computer
from the main menu, or press the
TRIP button on the center console
panel.

288

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１５：０４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２９４

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
MPG

Range

Shows the instantaneous fuel
economy in miles per gallon.

Shows the estimated distance you
can travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. This distance is estimated
from the average fuel economy over
the last several miles, so it will vary
with changes in speed, traffic, etc.

Instant Fuel

Shows you the current fuel economy
in miles per gallon.

Calendar

Resetting the Display

The average fuel, average speed, and
elapsed time meters can be reset
automatically (see page 75 ).

Elapsed Time

NOTE:
The ‘‘Average Fuel’’ and ‘‘MPG’’
may vary from actual fuel
consumed. These values are
estimates only.
The ‘‘Range’’ value is approximate,
and may vary from actual range.

Shows the elapsed time that the
ignition has been on since the display
was last reset.
Average Speed

Shows you the average speed in
miles per hour since the display was
last reset.

Features

Average Fuel

Shows you the average fuel economy
in miles per gallon since the display
was last reset.

The calendar feature allows you to
enter events and be reminded of
them in the future.
When you say ‘‘Calendar’’ or select
the Calendar on the Main Menu
screen, the display changes to the
calendar screen.
Dates with an icon indicate there is a
schedule entry for that date.
CONTINUED

289

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１５：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２９５

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
You can scroll through the calendar
day by day by turning the interface
knob, or select the day by voice.
When you push the interface
selector up or down, you can also
scroll through the calendar week by
week. When you say ‘‘Next month’’
or ‘‘Previous month,’’ or when you
push the interface selector to the
right or left, the system displays the
next or previous month.

Entering Your Schedule

Reminder

The default for the reminder is ON.
This allows the system to remind
you of the calendar item the next
time you start the vehicle. See
System Start-up on page 283 .
Title

Say or select ‘‘Edit title,’’ then enter
the name of your title using the
interface selector. Once you enter
the title, say or select ‘‘Done.’’ The
title will be displayed on the
specified date of the Calendar screen.
Set your schedule by selecting the
day on the calendar, and the display
changes to the Edit schedule
screen.

290

2010 RL

Message

Say or select ‘‘Edit message,’’ and
the system will show the Enter
Message screen. You can enter a
message on two lines. Use
to
change the line. Once you have
entered the message, say or select
‘‘Done.’’ The message will be
displayed on the specified date of the
calendar screen.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１５：２３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２９６

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Message Icon

Delete

NOTE:
You can only enter one message
per day.
To re-activate a previous message,
turn the reminder setting from
OFF to ON. If it is not turned on,
the reminder will not be displayed
when you start the vehicle.
For more information, refer to
System Start-up on page 283 .

Edit Date

Features

Say or select ‘‘Message icon,’’ and
the system displays a list of icons
you can select to help identify the
type of message you entered. The
message icon you choose will be
displayed alongside the specified
date on the calendar screen.
From the calendar screen, select
the date of the schedule you wish to
remove. To remove the schedule,
say or select ‘‘Delete.’’

This allows you to move your
calendar entry to a different date. If
you say or select ‘‘Edit date,’’ the
calendar screen is displayed with
existing entries grayed out. Select a
new day and the edit schedule
screen is redisplayed with the new
date.

Done

Once you have finished entering the
schedule, say or select ‘‘Done.’’ The
calendar screen is redisplayed and a
category icon appears.

CONTINUED

291

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１５：３２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２９７

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
3. Turn the interface knob until the
conversion you want is highlighted
(weight, for example), then push
the selector in to select it. The
screen for that conversion type
appears (see illustration in step 4).

Calculator

Convert

When you say or select ‘‘Calculator,’’
the display changes to the
Calculator screen.

Use the interface selector to control
the calculator, and calculator
‘‘conversion’’ feature.
To convert a unit of measurement,
do this:

Enter the digits and operation
symbols with the interface selector.

1. Enter a numeric value to be
converted (for example, 100).
2. Push the interface selector down
to select Unit conversion. The
screen above appears.

292

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１５：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２９８

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

4. Turn the interface knob until the
unit you want to convert from is
highlighted (kilogram, for
example), then push the selector
in to select it as it the example
above.

First Set up Screen

Features

System Set-up
The set-up functions consist of three
different screens that allow you to
change and update information in
the system. To display the set up
screen, say ‘‘Set up’’ or press the
SET UP button, and then select an
item. To select more setup items, say
‘‘More,’’ or select MORE at the top
right corner of the screen.

The first setup screen allows you to
change the system’s brightness,
contrast, black level, volume,
interface dial feedback, and clock
adjustment. To select a setup item,
turn the interface knob until it is
highlighted, then push the interface
selector in to select it.

CONTINUED

293

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１５：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０２９９

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Brightness

Black Level

Volume

There are 11 possible brightness
settings. To change the brightness,
say ‘‘Brightness up’’ or ‘‘Brightness
down.’’ You can also select
Brightness and change the setting
by turning the interface knob.

There are 11 possible black level
settings. To change the black level,
say ‘‘Black level up’’ or ‘‘Black level
down.’’ You can also select Black
Level and change the setting by
turning the Interface knob. Changes
to the display are very subtle − this
is normal.

To adjust the volume of the system
voice, do one of these actions:

Tip: If you are having trouble viewing
the screen in bright lighting conditions,
try increasing the brightness.
Contrast

There are 11 possible contrast
settings. To adjust the contrast, say
‘‘Contrast up’’ or ‘‘Contrast down.’’
You can also select Contrast and
change the setting by turning the
interface knob. Changes to the
display are very subtle − this is
normal.

NOTE: You can have separate
daytime and nighttime settings for
brightness, contrast, and black level.
Adjust each setting when the display
is in either daytime or nighttime
mode. Use the Display mode button
(see page 282 ) to select daytime or
nighttime mode.

294

2010 RL

Say ‘‘Volume up’’ or ‘‘Volume down.’’
Select Volume, then change the
setting by turning the interface
knob.
Select volume off.
NOTE: If you turn the volume off,
you will not hear voice command
confirmations.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１６：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３００

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Clock Adjustment

You can adjust the clock of your
system. When the battery is
disconnected or the fuse for the
compass system is removed, you
need to reset the time. See page
313 for more information on setting
the clock.

Setting

Feedback Level

The system always
reads what you select.

Auto
(default)

The system reads your
selection only while
the vehicle is moving.

The system does not
read your selection.

Second Set up Screen

Features

Interface Dial Feedback

Changing this setting allows you to
control when (and if) the system will
read the current selection you
choose with the interface dial. This
feature can minimize the need to
look at the screen while operating
the dial. The three settings are
explained in the following table. The
factory default setting is AUTO.

The second setup screen allows you
to change the system’s voice
recognition feedback, auto volume
for speed, and clock settings. To
select a setup item, turn the interface
knob until it is highlighted, then
push the interface selector in to
select it.

CONTINUED

295

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１６：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３０１

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
To view the second setup screen, say
‘‘More,’’ or move the interface
selector to the right to select MORE.
To go back to the first setup screen,
say ‘‘Backward,’’ or move the
interface selector to the left to select
BACK.

To change the color, select Day or
night by turning the interface knob
to the right or left. Press the
interface selector, then turn the
interface knob to select desired color.
Press the interface selector to enter
your choice.

Color

Voice Recognition Feedback

Allows you to turn voice control
system prompts ON or OFF . To
select ON or OFF, turn the interface
knob to the right or left, then press
the interface selector. When OFF ,
you will not hear the voice control
system confirmations or prompts.
Auto Volume for Speed

This compass system automatically
increases the system voice volume
according to the vehicle speed. This
setting allows you to adjust the rate
of the volume increase.
When you select OFF , the volume is
not increased by the vehicle speed.

To view the Select a color screen,
say ‘‘Color,’’ or select COLOR on the
screen. You can choose from one of
five colors for the day and night
display modes.

296

2010 RL

NOTE:
Choose silver metal (factory
default) as the Day color to obtain
the best display contrast.
Choose black metal (factory
default) as the Night color to
obtain the best display contrast.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１６：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３０２

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Third Set up Screen

To view the third setup screen, move
the interface selector down. To
return to the first setup screen, say
‘‘Backward,’’ or move the interface
selector to the left to select BACK.

Verbal Reminder

This function allows you to turn ON
or OFF verbal reminders. Examples
of these reminders include:
Driving with the parking brake on

A reminder to fasten the driver’s
and front passenger’s seat belts
To select ON or OFF, turn the
interface knob to the right or left,
then press the interface selector.

The third setup screen allows you to
change the system’s screen color
and verbal reminders. To select a
setup item, turn the interface knob
until it is highlighted, then push the
interface selector in to select it.

297

2010 RL

Features

Driving with the trunk or a door
open

０９／０４／０２ １９：１６：２９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３０３

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Setting Display Mode
Pressing the
(Display
mode) button allows you to switch
display modes.
Each time you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position, the display mode is in auto.
The screen changes between day
and night modes when you turn the
headlights on and off.
To override the auto mode, select
either day or night mode. This can
be useful if you want to use the
headlights during the day. Be aware
that using day mode at night will
make the screen extremely bright.

System Initialization
If for any reason, you lose power to
the compass system (the battery was
disconnected), the system needs to
be initialized before you can use it.

Entering the Security Code

Initialization requires this:
Entry of the compass system 4digit security code to ‘‘unlock’’ the
system.
GPS initialization. This may not be
needed depending on how long the
system was without power.

298

2010 RL

If the battery goes dead or is
disconnected for any reason, you will
have to enter a security code into
both the audio system and the
compass system before you can use
it again.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１６：３６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３０４

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
interface selector to the right.

GPS initialization

Follow the instructions in the audio
system section to enter the 5-digit
audio code (see page 280 ). The
system voice will not operate if the
audio code is not entered
Features

When you purchased the vehicle,
you should have received two cards
that have the audio and compass
system’s security codes and serial
numbers. Keep these cards in a safe
place in case you need the codes. If
you lose the cards, you must obtain
the security codes from your dealer.
Enter the four-digit compass system
security code. If you have entered it
correctly, the display changes to the
Disclaimer screen. You have ten
chances to enter the correct code. If
all ten are incorrect, turn the ignition
to OFF, then back to ON (II) to have
ten more chances to enter the
correct code.

Depending on the length of time the
battery was disconnected, your
system may require GPS
initialization. If it does, the above
screen appears. Follow the
instructions on the screen.

To enter the code, turn the interface
knob to select the number, then
press the interface selector to enter
it. Keep doing the same procedure to
enter all four correct numbers. If you
need to delete the number you
entered mistakenly, move the

CONTINUED

299

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１６：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３０５

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
After 30 minutes with this screen
displayed, turn off the engine and
restart the vehicle. If you now see
the Disclaimer screen, the GPS
initialization is complete.

If this procedure is not necessary the
system proceeds directly to the
Compass screen (see page 286 ).
During initialization, the system
searches for all available GPS
satellites, and obtains their orbital
information. During this procedure
the vehicle should be out in the open
with a clear view of the sky.

If within ten minutes the system fails
to locate a sufficient number of
satellites to locate your position, the
screen above appears. Follow the
instructions on the screen.

300

2010 RL

NOTE:
The average acquiring time is less
than 10 minutes, but it can take as
long as 45 minutes.
If the system is still unable to
acquire a signal, follow the
instructions on the screen, or
contact your local dealer for
assistance.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１６：４９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３０６

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (‘‘EULA’’), DO NOT
USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. INSTEAD,
PROMPTLY CONTACT ALPINE
ELECTRONICS, INC., FOR
INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF
THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A
REFUND. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE
DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE
YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS
EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).

GRANT OF SOFTWARE
LICENSE. This EULA grants you
the following license;
You may use the SOFTWARE only
on the DEVICE.
NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE
SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT
TOLERANT. ALPINE
ELECTRONICS, INC., HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED
HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN
THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS
RELIED UPON ALPINE
ELECTRONICS, INC., TO
CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING
TO DETERMINE THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR
SUCH USE.

CONTINUED

301

2010 RL

Features

License notice
You have acquired a device
(‘‘DEVICE’’) that includes software
licensed by ALPINE ELECTRONICS,
INC., from an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation (collectively ‘‘MS’’).
Those installed software products of
MS origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and
‘‘online’’ or electronic documentation
(‘‘SOFTWARE’’) are protected by
international intellectual property
laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE
is licensed, not sold. All rights
reserved.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１６：５３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３０７

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
NO WARRANTIES FOR THE
SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is
provided ‘‘AS IS’’ and with all faults.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY,
AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK
OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU.
ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH
YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE
SOFTWARE OR AGAINST
INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE
RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES
REGARDING THE DEVICE OR
THE SOFTWARE, THOSE
WARRANTIES DO NOT
ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE
NOT BINDING ON, MS.

No Liability for Certain Damages,
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW,
MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY
FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION
SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO
EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS
OF U.S.TWO HUNDRED FIFTY
DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).

302

2010 RL

Limitations, on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation, and Disassembly.
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law not with
standing this limitation.
Additional Software/Services. The
SOFTWARE may permit ALPINE
ELECTRONICS, INC.,, MS,
Microsoft Corporation or their
affiliates to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE
updates, supplements, add-on
components, or Internet- based
services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (‘‘Supplemental
Components’’).

０９／０４／０２ １９：１６：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３０８

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC.,, MS,
Microsoft Corporation and their
affiliates reserve the right to
discontinue any Internet-based
services provided to you or made
available to you through the use of
the SOFTWARE.

If MS, Microsoft Corporation or
their affiliates make available
Supplemental Components, and no
other EULA terms are provided,
then the terms of this EULA shall
apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate
entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the
licensor of the Supplemental
Component(s).

RECOVERY MEDIA. If
SOFTWARE is provided by ALPINE
ELECTRONICS, INC., on separate
media and labeled ‘‘Recovery Media’’
you may use the Recovery Media
solely to restore or reinstall the
SOFTWARE originally installed on
the DEVICE.

SOFTWARE TRANSFER
ALLOWED BUT WITH
RESTRICTIONS. You may
permanently transfer rights under
this EULA only as part of a
permanent sale or transfer of the
Device, and only if the recipient
agrees to this EULA. If the
SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any
transfer must also include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.

CONTINUED

303

2010 RL

Features

If ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC.,
provides or makes available to you
Supplemental Components and no
other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of
this EULA shall apply.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１７：０５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３０９

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You
acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of
US-origin. You agree to comply with
all applicable international and
national laws that apply to the
SOFTWARE, including the U.S.
Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
country destination restrictions
issued by U.S. and other
governments.
For additional information on
exporting the SOFTWARE, see http:
//www.microsoft.com/exporting/.

Voice Control Basics
TALK BUTTON

BACK BUTTON

NOTE: For models with navigation
system, refer to the navigation
system manual.
Your vehicle has a voice control
system that allows hands-free
operation of the audio system, the
climate control system and some
functions of the compass system.
The voice control system uses the
TALK and BACK buttons on the
steering wheel and a microphone

304

2010 RL

MICROPHONE
(on the ceiling)

near the map light on the ceiling.
NOTE: While using the voice control
system, all of the speakers are
muted.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１７：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３１０

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Talk Button

This button activates the voice
control system. Press it when you
want to give a voice command. See
Voice Command Index on page 307 for
a list of voice commands.

Most of the system’s functions can
be controlled by voice commands
activated with the Talk button. To
control your compass system by
voice:
Press and release the Talk button.
Wait for the beep.
Give a voice command.

If the system does not understand a
command or you wait too long to
give a command, it responds with
‘‘Pardon,’’ ‘‘Please repeat,’’ or ‘‘Would
you say again.’’ If the system cannot
perform a command or the
command is not appropriate for the
screen you are on, it sounds a beep.
Anytime you are not sure of what
voice commands are available on a
screen, you can always say ‘‘Help’’ at
any screen. The system can then
read the list of commands to you.

Once the microphone picks up your
command, the system changes the
display in response to the command
and prompts you for the next
command. Using the Talk button,
answer the prompts as required.
CONTINUED

305

2010 RL

Features

Back Button

This button has the same function as
the CANCEL button on the center
console (see page 282 ). When you
press it, the display returns to the
previous screen. When the previous
screen appears, the system replays
the last prompt. This button can be
used to cancel an audio, climate
control, or compass system voice
command up to one second after the
command confirmation.

Using the Voice Control System
You should use the voice control
system as much as possible, and
consider manual entry using the
interface dial as a ‘‘back-up’’
method of entry.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１７：２２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３１１

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
When you speak a command, the
system generally either repeats the
command as a confirmation or asks
you for further information. If you do
not wish to hear this feedback, you
can turn it off. See the Voice
Recognition Feedback setting in
Setup (see page 296 ).

Improving Voice Recognition
To achieve optimum voice
recognition, the following guidelines
should be followed:
NOTE: Make sure the correct screen
is displayed for the voice command
that you are using. See Voice
Command Index on page 307 .

If you hear a prompt such as ‘‘Please
use the interface dial to...’’ or ‘‘Please
choose an area with the interface
dial.’’ the system is asking for input
that cannot be done by voice.

Close the windows and the
moonroof.
The fan speed will be
automatically adjusted to low.
Make sure the airflow from the
A/C vents does not interfere with
the system microphone in the
ceiling console. Place your hand
over the microphone; if you feel
any airflow, adjust the vents.
After pressing the Talk button,
wait for the beep, then give a voice
command.
Give a voice command in a clear,
natural speaking voice without
pausing between words.

306

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１７：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３１２

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
If the system cannot recognize
your command because of
background noise, speak louder.

If you speak a command with
something in your mouth, or your
voice is either too high or too
husky, the system may
misinterpret your voice commands.
If you are still having trouble with
the voice control system, refer to
Voice Command Help on the
main menu screen.

Global Commands

The system accepts these
commands on any screen.
Help (reads list of the commands
for the displayed screen)
Set up (displays set up screen)
Display map guide (displays the
compass screen)
Display menu (displays the main
menu)
Information (displays the trip
computer screen)

Calculator
Repeat voice
Voice command help

The voice command help option on
the main menu lists many of the
following controls. To avoid
distraction while you are driving, the
system can read the commands for
you.
The commands are accessible at any
time while driving and can be read to
you so that you do not need to
memorize all of them.

Trip Computer
Backward (to previous screen,

same as CANCEL or BACK
button)
Cancel (cancels current activity)
What time is it?
Calendar

CONTINUED

307

2010 RL

Features

If the microphone picks up voices
other than yours, the system may
not interpret your voice
commands correctly.

Voice Command Index
The voice control system needs
appropriate voice commands for
controlling the climate control, the
audio system, and the compass
system.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１７：３８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３１３

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Climate Control Commands

The system accepts these climate
control commands on most screens.
Climate control full automatic (controls
temperature to 72 degrees F)
Climate control automatic (controls
temperature to your selection)
Climate control off
Air conditioner on
Air conditioner off
Air conditioner＊
Climate control defrost on
Climate control defrost off
Climate control defrost＊
Rear defrost on
Rear defrost off
Rear defrost＊

Climate control fresh air
Climate control recirculate
Climate control vent
Climate control bi-level (vent and

floor)

Temperature Commands

The system accepts these
commands on most screens.
Temperature ＃ degrees (＃: 57 to
87 degrees F)
Temperature up
Temperature down
Temperature max hot (displays HI)
Temperature max cold (displays

Climate control floor
Climate control floor and defrost
Fan speed up
Fan speed down
Fan speed ＃ (＃: 1−7) (for best

LO)

voice control, keep fan speed at 1 or
2)

Temperature balance
Drive temperature ＃ degrees (＃: 57

to 87 degrees F)
＊ : Repeating these commands
switches (toggles) the function
between On and Off.

308

2010 RL

Passenger temperature ＃ degrees

(＃: 57 to 87 degrees F)
Drive vent temperature adjustment
Passenger vent temperature
adjustment
Vent temperature up
Vent temperature down
Vent temperature max
Vent temperature minimum
Vent temperature normal

０９／０４／０２ １９：１７：４６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３１４

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
＊ : Repeating these commands
switches (toggles) the function
between On and Off.
NOTE: The commands for vent
temperature settings are available on
the climate control screen.

Audio System Commands

The system accepts these audio
system commands on most screens.
There are no voice commands for
XM radio.

Audio on
Audio off
Audio＊
Radio on (or Radio play)
Radio off
Radio＊
Radio select FM1
Radio select FM2
Radio select AM
Radio ＃ FM (＃: frequency.
Example Radio 95.5 FM)
Radio ＃ AM (＃: frequency.
Example Radio 1020 AM)
Radio seek up
Radio seek down
Radio next station (same as Radio

＊ : Repeating these commands
switches (toggles) the function
between On and Off.

CONTINUED

309

2010 RL

Features

Radio Commands

To control the radio system, say one
of the following commands:

seek)
Radio preset ＃ (＃: 1−6)
Radio FM preset ＃ (＃: 1−6)
Radio FM1 preset ＃ (＃: 1−6)
Radio FM2 preset ＃ (＃: 1−6)
Radio AM preset ＃ (＃: 1−6)
Radio auto select＊
Radio scan＊

０９／０４／０２ １９：１７：５３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３１５

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
CD Commands

The system accepts these
commands on most screens.
CD play
CD play disc ＃ (＃: 1−6)
CD play track ＃ (＃: 1−30)
CD play disc ＃1 track ＃2 (＃1: 1−6,

＃2: 1−30)
CD skip forward
CD skip back
CD play next disc
CD play previous disc
CD track random＊
CD track repeat＊
CD disc repeat＊
CD track scan＊
CD disk scan＊
CD normal play (resumes ‘‘Play’’

from these commands: ‘‘CD track
random,’’ ‘‘CD track repeat,’’ and
‘‘CD disc repeat’’)
CD track list
CD folder random＊
CD folder repeat＊
CD folder scan＊
CD folder list

＊ : Repeating these commands
switches (toggles) the function
between On and Off.
DVD Commands

The system accepts these
commands on most screens.
DVD play
DVD play disc ＃ (＃: 1−6)
DVD play track ＃ (＃: 1−30)
DVD play disc ＃1 track ＃2 (＃1:

1−6, ＃2: 1−30)
DVD skip forward
DVD skip back
DVD play next disc
DVD play previous disc
DVD track random＊
DVD track repeat＊
DVD disc repeat＊
DVD track scan＊
DVD disc scan＊
DVD normal play (resumes ‘‘Play’’

from these commands: ‘‘DVD
track random,’’ ‘‘DVD track repeat,’’
‘‘DVD disc repeat,’’ ‘‘DVD folder
random,’’ and ‘‘DVD folder

310

2010 RL

repeat’’)
DVD track list
DVD folder random
DVD folder repeat
DVD folder list

＊ : Repeating these commands
switches (toggles) the function
between On and Off.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１７：５８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３１６

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
MP3/WMA Commands

The system accepts these
commands on most screens.
MP3 play
MP3 play disc ＃ (＃: 1−6)
MP3 play track ＃ (＃: 1−30)
MP3 play disc ＃1 track ＃2 (＃1:
MP3 skip forward
MP3 skip back
MP3 play next disc
MP3 play previous disc
MP3 track random＊
MP3 track repeat＊
MP3 disc repeat＊
MP3 track scan＊
MP3 disc scan＊
MP3 normal play (resumes ‘‘Play’’

from these commands: ‘‘MP3
track random,’’ ‘‘MP3 track repeat,’’
‘‘MP3 disc repeat,’’ ‘‘MP3 folder
random,’’ and ‘‘MP3 folder
repeat’’)
MP3 track list
MP3 folder random＊
MP3 folder repeat＊

＊: Repeating these commands
switches (toggles) the function
between On and Off.

1−6, ＃2: 1−30)
WMA skip forward
WMA skip back
WMA play next disc
WMA play previous disc
WMA track random＊
WMA track repeat＊
WMA disc repeat＊
WMA track scan＊
WMA disc scan＊
WMA normal play (resumes ‘‘Play’’

Features

1−6, ＃2: 1−30)

MP3 folder list
WMA play
WMA play disc ＃ (＃: 1−6)
WMA play track ＃ (＃: 1−30)
WMA play disc ＃1 track ＃2 (＃1:

from these commands: ‘‘WMA
track random,’’ ‘‘WMA track
repeat,’’ ‘‘WMA disc repeat,’’
‘‘WMA folder random,’’ and
‘‘WMA folder repeat’’)
WMA track list
WMA folder random＊
WMA folder repeat＊
WMA folder list
CONTINUED

311

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１８：０５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３１７

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Main Menu Screen Commands

Set up Screen Commands

These are additional commands not
found on the Voice Commands
Help screen. Follow the voice
prompts.
Voice command help (the system
reads and lists all of the
commands)

The system accepts these
commands on the first setup screen.
(For the second and third setup
screens, simply say what is written
on the screen, and follow the voice
prompts)

Calendar
Calculator
Trip computer

Brightness up
Brightness down
Brightness minimum/min.
Brightness maximum/max.
Contrast up
Contrast down
Contrast minimum/min
Contrast maximum/max
Black level up
Black level down
Black level minimum/min
Black level maximum/max
Volume up
Volume down
Volume minimum/min.
Volume maximum/max.
Volume Off
Interface Dial feedback off
Interface Dial feedback auto

312

2010 RL

Interface Dial feedback on
On-Screen Commands

The system accepts over 100 onscreen commands. The only
commands that must be chosen by
the interface dial are listed below.
Next
Previous
Return
OK
Delete

０９／０４／０２ １９：１８：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３１８

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)
Setting the Clock
To set the clock, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, and either or both
remotes must be linked.

Features

Say ‘‘Set up’’ or press the SET UP
button on the center console to
display the Set up screen. Then
move the interface dial to the right.

Select the Clock Adjustment by
turning the interface knob to the
right, then press the center of the
interface selector.

Select the Time Adjustment , then
press the center of the interface
selector. The display changes to the
Time Adjustment screen for HOUR.

CONTINUED

313

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１８：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３１９

Compass System (U.S. model without navigation system)

To adjust the hour, turn the interface
knob, then press the center of the
interface selector.
To adjust the minute, turn the
interface knob to the right to display
the adjustment screen for MINUTE.

Turn the interface knob to adjust the
minute.
Press the center of the interface
selector to enter the time. The
screen will return to the Clock
adjustment screen (see page 313 ).

314

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１８：２５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３２０

Security System

The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, close the hood, and close the
trunk. For the system to activate,
you must lock the doors from the
outside with the remote, built-in key,
lock tab, or door lock switch. The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.

With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
without triggering the alarm. The
alarm will sound if the trunk lock is
forced, or the trunk is opened with
the trunk release button on the
driver’s door or the emergency trunk
opener.

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Once the security system is set,
opening any door or the hood
without using the built-in key or the
remote will cause it to sound. It also
sounds if the radio is removed from
the dashboard or the audio system
wiring is cut.

The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door and Trunk Open
monitor on the instrument panel (see
page 13 ) to see if the doors and
trunk are fully closed. Since it is not
part of the monitor display, manually
check the hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.

315

2010 RL

Features

The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking/side marker
lights, and taillights flash if someone
attempts to break into your vehicle
or remove the radio. This alarm
continues for 2 minutes, then the
system resets. To reset an alarming
system before the 2 minutes have
elapsed, unlock either front door
with the remote or the built-in key.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１８：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３２１

Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.

on the steering wheel, and hold it
for 1 second (see page 333 ).

Using Cruise Control
CRUISE (ACC) BUTTON
RES/
ACCEL
BUTTON

SET/
DECEL
BUTTON
Non-ACC model is shown

1. Push in the CRUISE button or the
ACC button (models with adaptive
cruise control) on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE MAIN or
green ACC indicator (models with
ACC) indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
On models with adaptive cruise
control

To switch from ACC to cruise
control, press the distance button

316

2010 RL

2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
icon appears on the multiinformation display to show the
system is now activated.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１８：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３２２

Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle speeds up about 1
mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL icon on the multiinformation display will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.

CONTINUED

317

2010 RL

Features

Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel cruise
control. On models with adaptive
cruise control (ACC), this also
causes the cruise control icon on the
multi-information display to go off
and the cruise mode icon to come on.
To resume the set speed, press the
RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE
CONTROL icon on the multiinformation display will come back
on.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１８：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３２３

Cruise Control
Even with cruise control on, you can
still use the accelerator pedal to
speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.

Canceling Cruise Control
CRUISE (ACC) BUTTON

Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.

Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL [ACC
(green)] indicator comes on. The
vehicle accelerates to the same
speed as before.

CANCEL BUTTON
Non-ACC model is shown

You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE (ACC) button.

318

2010 RL

Pressing the CRUISE (ACC) button
turns the system completely off and
erases the previous cruising speed.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１８：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３２４

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ACC Components
If equipped

ACC INDICATOR
RES/ACCEL BUTTON
ACC BUTTON

SET/DECEL
BUTTON
Features

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
consists of a radar sensor in the
front grille, the ACC buttons on the
steering wheel, and the ACC
functions of the multi-information
display.

MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY

The radar sensor for ACC is shared
with the collision mitigation brake
system (CMBS). For more
information on the radar sensor, see
page 414 . For more information on
CMBS, see page 413 .

DISTANCE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON

319

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１９：０８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３２５

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Overview
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) allows
you to maintain a set speed and keep
the vehicle ahead of you and your
vehicle at a safe distance without
having to use the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
When the vehicle ahead of you slows
down or speeds up, ACC senses the
change in distance and compensates
by accelerating or braking your
vehicle to reach the cruising speed
you previously set. The distance
between vehicles is based on your
speed: the faster you go, the longer
the distance will be; the slower you
go, the shorter it will be.

If the vehicle ahead of you slows
down suddenly or another vehicle
cuts in front of your vehicle, ACC
alerts you by sounding a beeper and
displaying a message on the multiinformation display.
The ACC radar sensor in the front
grille can detect and monitor the
distance of a vehicle up to 328 feet
(100 meters) ahead of your vehicle.
For more information on the radar
sensor, see page 414 .
Important Safety Precautions
As with any system, there are limits
to ACC. Inappropriate use of ACC
can result in a serious accident. Use
the brake pedal whenever necessary,
and always keep a safe distance
between your vehicle and other
vehicles.

320

2010 RL

Do not use ACC under these
conditions:
In poor visibility.
In heavy traffic.
When you must slow down and
speed up repeatedly.
On winding roads.
When you enter a toll gate,
interchange, service area, parking
area, etc. In these areas, there is
no vehicle ahead of you, and ACC
would still try to accelerate to your
set speed.
In bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)
On a slippery road (for example a
road covered with ice or snow).

０９／０４／０２ １９：１９：１６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３２６

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Operating Characteristics
Improper use of ACC can lead
to a crash.

Features

Use ACC only when traveling
on open highways in good
weather.

When there is no vehicle ahead within
ACC range

Your vehicle will maintain a set
cruising speed.

When a vehicle ahead is within ACC
range and going slower than your set
speed

If the vehicle ahead of you is going
slower than your set speed, your
vehicle will slow down to the speed
of that vehicle. Your vehicle will then
follow at a constant distance until the
vehicle ahead changes speed again.
CONTINUED

321

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１９：２２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３２７

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
If the vehicle ahead of you slows
down abruptly, or if another vehicle
cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds
and a message appears on the multiinformation display to warn you.
In this case, decelerate your vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal, and
keep an appropriate distance from
the vehicle ahead.

When a vehicle ahead is within ACC
range and going at a steady speed

Your vehicle follows the vehicle
ahead of it, keeping a constant
distance. ACC will not keep your
vehicle at a constant distance if the
vehicle ahead of you goes out of
range of your set speed.

322

2010 RL

If the vehicle ahead of you slows
down and changes lanes, ACC no
longer tracks it. Your vehicle will
then return to your set speed.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１９：２７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３２８

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Limitations
ACC does not work below 25 mph
(40 km/h). It cannot bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.

Features

ACC will not sound a beeper or
display a message on the multiinformation display to warn you of
vehicles going slower than 13 mph
(20 km/h) or vehicles that are
parked. In these cases, it is up to
you to maintain a safe distance by
using the brake pedal.

ACC may react to vehicles beside
you or even a building beside you
by momentarily applying the
brakes or sounding a beeper under
conditions such as a sudden curve
or narrowing of the road, an
abrupt movement of the steering
wheel, or if you are in an unusual
position within your lane.

ACC may not recognize
motorcycles or other small
vehicles ahead of your vehicle.

323

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１９：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３２９

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Using the ACC
SET/DECEL BUTTON

ACC BUTTON

1. Push the ACC button on the
steering wheel. The ACC indicator
on the instrument panel comes on,
and ‘‘ACC’’ is shown on the multiinformation display.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel, then release the
accelerator pedal.
If you press the SET/DECEL button
when the vehicle speed is below 25
mph (40 km/h), you will hear a beep
about 1 second. This means ACC is
not activated, and you cannot set
your speed.

324

2010 RL

When your speed reaches 25 mph
(40 km/h), ACC goes into wait mode,
and ‘‘ACC’’ is shown on the multiinformation display.

０９／０４／０２ １９：１９：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３３０

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
To change the speed unit
measurement from mph to km/h,
see page 92 .

U.S.

SET VEHICLE
SPEED

Features

SET VEHICLE
DISTANCE
CANADA

U.S.

INITIAL SPEED UNIT
CANADA

When the speed is set, it is shown
along with a vehicle icon and
distance bars on the multiinformation display.
Refer to page 328 for how to set and
change the set distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of
you.

If you change the speed unit
measurement from the factory
default setting, the initial speed unit
measurement is shown under the
current unit.

325

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：１９：５０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３３１

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Increasing the Set Speed

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

The set speed can be increased by
using the RES/ACCEL button or the
accelerator pedal.

To increase the set speed with the
RES/ACCEL button, do this:

To increase the set speed with the
accelerator pedal, do this:

Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. The vehicle will accelerate.
When you reach the speed you want,
release the button.

Press the accelerator pedal to
increase to the speed you want, then
press the SET/DECEL button. The
set speed will be shown on the multiinformation display. If you do not
press the SET/DECEL button, your
vehicle will return to the previously
set speed.

To increase your speed in small
amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL
button repeatedly. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up about
1 mph (1 km/h).
While the vehicle accelerates to the
set speed, the set speed on the multiinformation display will flash.
If a vehicle ahead of you is driving at
a slower speed than the speed you
want to set, your vehicle will not
accelerate; it will keep some distance
between your vehicles.

326

2010 RL

The ACC beeper will not sound
while you press the accelerator pedal,
no matter how close you get to the
vehicle ahead of you.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２０：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３３２

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Decreasing the Set Speed
The set speed can be decreased
using the SET/DECEL button or the
brake pedal.
To decrease the set speed with the
SET/DECEL button, do this:

Detecting a Vehicle Ahead of You
U.S.

The set cruising speed will be shown
on the multi-information display.
On a steep downhill, the vehicle
speed may exceed the set cruising
speed.

Features

SET/DECEL BUTTON

Each time you do this, your vehicle
slows down about 1 mph (1 km/h).

CANADA

To decrease the set speed with the
brake pedal, do this:

Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when you
reach the speed you want.

Tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle slows down to the speed you
want, press the SET/DECEL button.
The set speed will be shown on the
multi-information display. If you use
the brake pedal to decrease speed,
and then press the RES/ACCEL
button, your vehicle will return to the
previously set speed.

To slow down in small amounts, tap
the SET/DECEL button repeatedly.

When the system detects a vehicle
ahead of you, a beeper sounds once
and a solid-line vehicle icon appears
on the multi-information display.

CONTINUED

327

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２０：０９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３３３

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Changing Vehicle Distance
U.S.

DISTANCE BUTTON

The higher your vehicle speed is, the
longer the distance between the
vehicle in front will be set as shown
below.

CANADA

When that vehicle changes lanes or
goes out of ACC range, a beeper
sounds once. If there is no vehicle
ahead of you within ACC range, a
dotted-line vehicle icon will be on the
multi-information display.
To set the ACC beeper on or off, see
page 90 .

To change the range, press the
DISTANCE button. Each time you
press the button, the range changes
from Long, to Middle, and then to
Short.

With ACC on, the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of
you is controlled and maintained.
You can change this distance to one
of three ranges: long, middle, or
short.

328

2010 RL

Speed
Vehicle
Distance
Long
Middle
Short

50 mph
(80 km/h)

65 mph
(104 km/h)

154 feet
47 meters
111 feet
34 meters
85 feet
26 meters

200 feet
61 meters
173 feet
42 meters
101 feet
31 meters

０９／０４／０２ １９：２０：２２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３３４

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The distance you select is also
shown on the multi-information
display.

Canceling the ACC
CANCEL BUTTON

U.S.
LONG
RANGE

If you cancel ACC by pressing the
ACC button, the previously set
cruising speed is erased from
memory.

U.S.
MIDDLE
RANGE
CANADA

ACC is canceled whenever you do
any of these actions:
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.

U.S.

Tap the brake pedal.

SHORT
RANGE
CANADA

Press the ACC button. The ACC
indicator in the instrument panel
goes off.

329

2010 RL

Features

CANADA

When you push the CANCEL button
or tap the brake pedal to cancel ACC,
the set cruising speed stays in
memory. When you turn on ACC
again, the speed is shown on the
multi-information display. To return
to that speed, accelerate to over 25
mph (40 km/h), then press the RES/
ACCEL button.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２０：３３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３３５

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Automatic ACC Cancellation
When ACC is automatically canceled,
the beeper sounds about 1 second,
and an ACC OFF message appears
on the multi-information display for 3
seconds.

Driving on a mountainous road, or
driving off road for extended
periods.

ACC Indicator
ACC INDICATOR

Abrupt steering wheel movement.
When the ABS or VSA is activated.

Any of these conditions may cause
ACC to cancel:
The vehicle speed decreases
below 22 mph (35 km/h).
Poor weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
When the radar sensor in the front
grille gets dirty.
The vehicle ahead of you cannot
be detected.
An abnormal tire condition is
detected, or the tires are skidding.

When the VSA indicator comes on.
If ACC is cancelled by any these
conditions, wait until the condition
improves, then press the RES/
ACCEL button to restore ACC.
When you do this, the vehicle will
resume its set cruising speed.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position after ACC was automatically
cancelled, the set speed is erased,
and you must enter it again (see
page 324 ).

This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the ACC
system. If this happens, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked.
The ACC system cannot be used
while this indicator is on.

330

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２０：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３３６

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Messages on the
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display shows
various messages related to ACC.
For a description of each ACC
message you may see, refer to the
chart on this and the following page.

Message

Description

ACC is on.

ACC detects a vehicle ahead of you.

CANADA

You will hear a beep when the vehicle
moves out of the ACC radar sensor’s
range.

U.S.

ACC does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you.

CANADA

You will hear a beep when ACC
detects a vehicle ahead of you.

Features

U.S.

CONTINUED

331

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２０：４８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３３７

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Message

Description

Message

Description

ACC has automatically cancelled
because its radar sensor in the front
grill is dirty.

Apply the brakes immediately.
Your vehicle is too close to the vehicle
ahead of it.

You will hear a beep about 1 second.

You will hear a continuous beep.

ACC has automatically cancelled
because of bad weather or other
conditions.

ACC needs to be checked.

You will hear a beep about 1 second.

332

2010 RL

Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２０：５５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３３８

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Switching to Cruise Control
DISTANCE BUTTON

Features

Press the distance button.

To switch from ACC to cruise
control, press the distance button on
the steering wheel, and hold it for 1
second.

When you press the button, you will
see CRUISE MODE SELECTED on
the multi-information display for 2
seconds. To switch back to ACC,
press and hold the distance button
again for 1 second.

When the cruise control is selected,
ACC does not sound a beeper or
display a message on the multiinformation display. Make sure to
keep a safe distance from the vehicle
ahead of you.
Always be aware which mode is
selected.

333

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２１：０４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３３９

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate up to
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
General Safety Information
Before programming your
HomeLink to operate a garage door
opener, confirm that the opener has
an external entrapment protection
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features.
Units manufactured between April 1,
1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
equipped with safety stop and
reverse features. If your unit does
not have an external entrapment
protection system, an easy test to
confirm the function and
performance of the safety stop and
reverse feature is to lay a 2 × 4
under the closing door. The door
should stop and reverse upon
contacting the piece of wood.
As an additional safety feature,
garage door openers manufactured
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that
came with your garage door opener

334

2010 RL

to test that the safety features are
functioning properly. If you do not
have this information, contact the
manufacturer of the equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a
garage door or gate opener, make
sure that people and objects are out
of the way of the device to prevent
potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door
opener, park just outside the garage.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin − If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 10−20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２１：１７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３４０

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

Features

CONTINUED

335

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２１：２２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３４１

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

336

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２１：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３４２

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
RL Technology Package models

Interface Dial
Most AcuraLink functions are
controlled by the interface dial. The
interface dial has two parts, a knob
and a selector.
KNOB

ENTER

Features

AcuraLink enhances your
ownership experience by providing a
direct communication link between
your vehicle and the Acura Server.
Working through the XM radio
satellite, AcuraLink works in
conjunction with the navigation
system, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(HFL), and audio system in your
vehicle. It displays and receives
several kinds of messages, including:
Operating tips and information on
your vehicle’s features.
Maintenance information to keep
your vehicle in top condition.
Diagnostic information to provide
information about any problems
with your vehicle.

SELECTOR

The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.

Important recall and safety
information.

337

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２１：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３４３

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To view previously read messages:

Reading Messages
If you have new messages, an
envelope icon appears in the top
right corner of the navigation screen.

A list of all messages will be shown.
New messages will be at the top.
Select the message you want to read
by pressing ENTER.
To open a message:
Press ENTER on the interface
selector, then select New Message
from the navigation system map
menu.

A red exclamation will be marked on
an envelope icon with an important
message.

338

2010 RL

Press the INFO button. The
information screen will be shown.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２１：４９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３４４

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Unread messages have a closed
envelope icon next to them. The icon
disappears when it has already been
read.

Message Options

Select ‘‘Messages’’, then select a
message category. Select the
message you want to read and press
ENTER.

After purchasing your vehicle,
messages may not appear
immediately.
Your dealer has to register the
vehicle identification before you can
receive messages. This can take
several days to process.

Features

NOTE: Only Diagnostic appear on
messages screen while driving. They
indicate your vehicle has a problem
that may need immediate attention
(see page 341 ).

When you open a message, you can
read a summary of it, and then
choose one of several options. If an
option is not available for a message,
that option will not be highlighted.

CONTINUED

339

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２１：５６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３４５

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Delete − Select this option to delete
the current message.
Voice − Select this option to hear a
voice read the entire message. This
gives you more information than the
screen can display at one time. When
you select the Voice option, it
changes to a Stop Reading option.
Select the option again to stop the
voice.
Call − Select this option to call a
phone number embedded in the
message. When you select Call, the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
dials the number for you.

Find Nearest Dealer − Select this
option to find the nearest Acura
dealer using the navigation system.
Call Your Dealer − Select this
option to call the Acura dealer you
purchased your vehicle from.
AcuraLink also directs you to this
dealer so you can schedule a
maintenance appointment or receive
information about a message. If your
assigned servicing dealer changes,
AcuraLink will reset to call that
dealer.

To make a call, your Bluetooth
compatible phone must be paired to
the vehicle’s HandsFreeLink system,
powered on, and located within the
vehicle (see page 360 ).

340

2010 RL

Diagnostic Info − Select this
option to get more information about
the current diagnostic message. To
use this option, your cellphone must
be paired with the HFL. In addition,
the paired phone must have a
compatible data service and be set
up with the AcuraLink system to
make a data connection. Access the
handsfreelink.com website to find
out which data services are currently
compatible with AcuraLink.
Message Preferences
To set your AcuraLink preferences
(the types of messages you want to
receive, if any), visit the My Acura
website at www.owners.acura.com, and
choose what you would like to
receive. If you do not have internet
access, call Acura Client Services at
(800) 382-2238; they can set your
message preferences for you.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２２：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３４６

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Deleting Messages
NOTE: Diagnostic info and recall/
campaign messages can only be
deleted by your dealer.

Scroll to the Messages option,
then select it by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector.

NOTE: The Delete All Messages
command does not apply to
Diagnostic Info and Recall messages.
They can only be deleted by your
dealer.
Press the SETUP button to view
the setup screen.
Select Other by pushing the
interface selector to the right.

Use the interface knob to scroll to
the AcuraLink/Messages option,
and select it by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector.
Scroll to the Delete Messages
option, and select it by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
Scroll to the category with the
messages you want to delete, and
select the category by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.

Select the message category that
contains the message you want to
delete.
Use the interface knob to scroll up
or down to the message title you
want to delete, and select it by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector.
Scroll to Delete with the interface
knob, and select it by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.

341

2010 RL

Features

To delete a single message:
Press the INFO button to bring up
the Information screen.

To delete all messages:

０９／０４／０２ １９：２２：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３４７

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Message Categories
There are six message categories in
AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature
Guide, Maintenance Minder,
Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,
and Scheduled Dealer Appointment.
The system can store up to 255
messages.

Quick Tips

Feature Guide

These messages, based on updated
vehicle information and comments
from other RL owners, supplement
your Owner’s Manual. They provide
you with relevant information for a
safe and enjoyable ownership
experience. For additional
information, call Acura Client
Services directly through the HFL.

During the first 90 days of
ownership, a number of messages
appears each day. These messages
help you to use and understand the
features of your vehicle.

Message categories can be added,
revised, or deleted through
broadcast messages from Acura.

342

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２２：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３４８

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Maintenance Minder

You can use the following message
options:
Make an appointment from the
schedule at the dealer.

Call your dealer for an
appointment.
Find the nearest dealer.
These messages provide detailed
information about the service
needed for your vehicle. When a
maintenance message appears on
the multi-information display, a list of
needed maintenance items is
provided through an AcuraLink
message. These messages tell you
the exact maintenance needed,
helping you to avoid unnecessary
maintenance costs.

To use the automated appointment
function, you should visit the My
Acura website at
www.owners.acura.com, register some
required settings, and complete the
Phone-Data Connection set-up (see
page 352 ). Your Bluetooth
compatible phone should also be
paired and linked to your vehicle’s
Bluetooth HFL (see page 354 ).

CONTINUED

343

2010 RL

Features

Reschedule the appointment with
the dealer.

Automated Appointment

You can make an appointment with
your dealer through the AcuraLink
when you receive a maintenance
minder message.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２２：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３４９

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

When you see the maintenance
minder message on the multiinformation display, you will also
receive a message in the navigation
screen. To open the message, press
ENTER. Select ‘‘New Messages,’’
then press ENTER. You will see the
list of all messages. The most recent
message is listed at the top.

Select the received message, then
press ENTER. You will see the
message as shown. To make an
appointment, select ‘‘Schedule
Dealer Appt.’’ then press ENTER.

344

2010 RL

The system will automatically
connect to the Acura server, then
show you an appropriate
appointment date and time on the
navigation screen. If you accept this
appointment, select ‘‘Confirm
Appointment,’’ then press ENTER.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２２：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３５０

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Scheduled Dealer Appointment
To reschedule the appointment:

Features

The confirmation message will be
displayed on the screen. Make sure
to confirm the appointment date,
time and dealer. If it is OK, press
ENTER.
If you want to change or reschedule
the appointment date, select ‘‘Cancel,’’
then press ENTER.

Press the INFO button to go to the
information screen. Select
‘‘Messages,’’ then select ‘‘Scheduled
Dealer Appointment’’ from the
message category list. Then press
ENTER.

You will see the screen to reschedule
as shown. To make an appointment,
select ‘‘Reschedule Appointment,’’
then press ENTER.
The system will automatically
connect to the Acura server, then
show you a new appointment date
and time on the navigation screen. If
you accept this appointment, select
‘‘Confirm Appointment,’’ then press
CONTINUED
ENTER.

345

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２２：４７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３５１

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To cancel the appointment:

Select ‘‘Messages’’ on the
information screen, then press
ENTER. Select ‘‘Scheduled Dealer
Appointment’’ from the message
category list. Then press ENTER. To
cancel the appointment, select
‘‘Cancel Appointment,’’ then press
ENTER.

The system will request you to
confirm the cancel on the navigation
screen. To cancel the appointment,
select ‘‘YES,’’ then press ENTER. If
you select ‘‘NO,’’ the screen goes
back to the previous message display.

346

2010 RL

The system will automatically
connect to the Acura server, then
show you the confirmation on the
navigation screen. If you accept the
cancel, press ENTER.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２２：５４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３５２

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
If you select the cancel appointment,
you cannot try to reschedule the
appointment. If you want to change
or reschedule the appointment date,
call your dealer directly with HFL.

Using automated appointment, your
registered dealer through My Acura
is automatically selected. If you want
to select another dealer, such as in
case of an emergency, find the
nearest dealer and call the dealer
directly with HFL.

Recall/Campaigns

Features

When a maintenance appointment is
due soon, you will also receive an
appointment reminder message.

If your vehicle is affected by a recall
or other important safety
information, a letter will be mailed to
you about the issue and how to fix it.
If you don’t get your vehicle fixed,
you will also receive a reminder
message through AcuraLink. You
can then use the message options to
call your dealer for an appointment
or to find the nearest dealer.
CONTINUED

347

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２３：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３５３

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
For this reason, it is important that
we retain your current phone
number. Please update your
information using My Acura at
www.owners.acura.com.

Diagnostic Info
When an indicator comes on or a
message is displayed on the MultiInformation Display (MID),
AcuraLink can provide information
about the cause of the indicator or
message and the recommended
action to address it. This helps you
handle the problem as it occurs,
preventing or limiting costly repairs.
The AcuraLink system cannot
determine some mechanical
problems (such as squeaks or
rattles) that are not triggered by the
diagnostic indicator monitors.
For more information on the
instrument panel indicators, see page
61 .

When any indicator comes on or a
message is displayed on the MID,
AcuraLink immediately notifies you
with the message, ‘‘An indicator is on.
AcuraLink can help you decide what
to do.’’
If you do not want the information
right away, select the Check Later
option.

348

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２３：１０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３５４

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
If you want the information now,
select the Check Now option. (If the
navigation screen is not active, you
must select OK from the navigation
disclaimer screen before you can
check the information.)

Reminder Message

You can then use the message
options to call your dealer for an
appointment or to find the nearest
dealer.

Features

Depending on the severity of the
problem, the message will let you
know if you should see your dealer
immediately or if you can wait until a
later date.
When viewing a diagnostic info
message through the INFO menu,
you can use the Diagnostic Info
option to connect to the Acura server
and retrieve the latest information
regarding the problem.
NOTE: There may not be any
additional information, depending on
the time elapsed since the previous
time you retrieved the information
from the Acura server.

When you make an appointment
through My Acura’s online Schedule
Service Appointment, you can be
reminded in advance about that
appointment through AcuraLink.
If you need to reschedule or cancel
the appointment, see page 345 .

CONTINUED

349

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２３：１５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３５５

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Turning the Automated Appointment
preference off will disable
appointment notifications in the
vehicle based on appointments
created or changed at My Acura’s
online scheduling website.

AcuraLink/Message Screen

Appointments can still be created,
rescheduled, and canceled from the
vehicle; however the appointment
information stored in the vehicle will
not be updated. Any changes to
those appointments should be made
from the My Acura website.

350

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２３：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３５６

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
To access the following functions,
press the SETUP option, push the
interface selector to the right to
select Other, then rotate the
interface knob to select AcuraLink/
Messages.

New Message Notification −
Select ON if you want to be notified
of new messages (envelope icon
appears on the navigation screen).
Select OFF if you do not want to be
notified of new messages (envelope
icon does not appear on the screen).
Messages can still be accessed using
the INFO menu. If you would like to
stop receiving messages, visit the
My Acura website at www.owners.
acura.com to change your messaging
preferences.

CONTINUED

351

2010 RL

Features

Delete Messages − Select this
option to delete all stored messages
within a category, except for
diagnostic info and recall campaign
messages. These messages can only
be deleted by a certified technician
after the recall is done or the
problem is corrected, or through a
broadcast message from Acura.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２３：２６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３５７

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Auto Reading − Select ON to have
the system automatically read each
message to you. Select OFF to
manually select the Voice option
when you want a message read to
you.

Phone-Data Connection − Select
this option to begin the process
required to connect to Acura. This is
used to access the most recent
diagnostic information when a
problem occurs.

NOTE: For the Phone Data
Connection button to be active, you
need a Bluetooth compatible and
enabled cell phone paired to the
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).
To complete the data connection
setup, the paired phone must have a
compatible data service.

352

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２３：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３５８

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)
Connect to the Acura Server −
The default setting is prompt. When
a diagnostic info message appears,
and you select the Check Now option,
the system will prompt you before
connecting to the Acura server. If
you do not wish to connect at that
time, select No at the prompt, and
you will see the information from the
onboard database. The ‘‘Auto’’
setting will remove the prompt when
you select the Check Now option and
will automatically connect to the
Acura server. This setting only
applies when you have a Bluetooth
enabled phone that is paired with
HFL and you have completed the
Phone-Data Connection setup.

353

2010 RL

Features

To find more information on
Bluetooth compatible and enabled
cell phones, visit
www.acura.com/handsfreelink or call
the HandsFreeLink consumer
support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada,
visit www.acura.ca, or call 1-866-78ACURA.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２３：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３５９

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using voice commands,
without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

To use HFL, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:

HFL TALK
BUTTON

In the U.S., visit www.acura.com/
handsfreelink , or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
(866) 78-ACURA.

Voice Control Tips

HFL Buttons

HFL BACK
BUTTON

NAVI VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS

HFL Talk button − Press and
release to give a command or answer
a call.
HFL Back button − Press and
release to end a call, go back to the
previous command, or cancel the
command.

354

2010 RL

MICROPHONE
(on the ceiling)

Air or wind noise from the
dashboard and side vents and
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２３：４７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３６０

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say ‘‘Call 123-456-7890’’ or ‘‘Dial
Peter.’’

Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.

When HFL is in use, navigation
voice commands cannot be
recognized.

Help Features

To hear general HFL information,
including help on pairing a phone
or setting up the system, say
‘‘Tutorial.’’
For help at any time, including a
list of available commands, say
‘‘Hands free help.’’

To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.

CONTINUED

355

2010 RL

Features

Press and release the HFL Talk
button each time you want to
make a command. After the beep,
speak in a clear, natural tone.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２３：５４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３６１

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
With the HFL system activated, you
will also see ‘‘HF LINK’’ on the upper
display.

Information Display

As an incoming call notification, you
will see the following display:
SIGNAL
STRENGTH

HFL
MODE

ROAM STATUS

BATTERY
LEVEL STATUS

PHONE DIALING

Some phones may send battery,
signal strength, and roaming status
information to HFL.

A notification that there is an
incoming call, or HFL is in use, will
appear on the navigation screen
when the audio system is on.

356

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２４：０２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３６２

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
How to Use HFL
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Press HFL
Talk button

‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’

Pair a phone to the system (See page 360)

‘‘Edit’’

Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 361)

‘‘Delete’’

Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 361)

‘‘List’’

Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 361)

‘‘Status’’

Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
(See page 361)

‘‘Next Phone’’

Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 361)

‘‘Set Pairing
Code’’

Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number
(See page 362)

‘‘123-555-＃＃＃＃’’
‘‘Jim Smith’’

Features

‘‘Phone Setup’’

‘‘Pair’’

Enter desired phone number (See page 362)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
(See page 363)

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

CONTINUED

357

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２４：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３６３

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

‘‘Redial’’

Redial the last number called (See page 363)

‘‘Transfer’’

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 365)

‘‘Mute’’

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 365)

‘‘Send’’

Send numbers or names during a call (See page 365)

Press HFL
Talk button

‘‘Phonebook’’

‘‘Store’’

Store a phonebook entry (See page 365)

‘‘Edit’’

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 366)

‘‘Delete’’

Delete a phonebook entry (See page 366)

‘‘Receive
Contact’’

If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
your phone to HFL (See page 367)

‘‘List’’

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 367)

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

358

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２４：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３６４

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system (See page 372)

‘‘Security’’

Change your security passcode (See page 372)

‘‘Call Notification’’

Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
(See page 372)

‘‘Auto Transfer’’
Press HFL
Talk button

‘‘Clear’’

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle (See page 373)
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
passcode (See page 373)

‘‘Change Language’’

Change language from English to French (See page 374)＊

‘‘Tutorial’’

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 355)

‘‘Hands Free Help’’

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 355)

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
＊ : Canadian models

CONTINUED

359

2010 RL

Features

‘‘System
Set up’’

‘‘Change Passcode’’

０９／０４／０２ １９：２４：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３６５

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.

Phone Setup
This command group is available for
paired cell phones.
Phone pairing tips

You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Your phone must be in discovery
or search mode to pair. Refer to
your phone’s manual.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
If after three minutes your phone
is not ready to pair or a phone is
not found, the system will time out
and return to idle.

360

2010 RL

To pair a cell phone:

1. Press and release the HFL Talk
button. If you are pairing a phone
for the first time, HFL will give
you information about the pairing
process. If it is not the first phone
you are pairing, say ‘‘Phone
setup’’ and say ‘‘Pair.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and put
your phone in discovery or search
mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit
pairing code and begin searching
for your phone.
3. When your phone finds a
Bluetooth device, select HFL from
the options and enter the 4-digit
code from the previous step.
4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the newly paired phone.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２４：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３６６

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To rename a paired phone:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

To hear the names of all paired
phones:

To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’

2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.

2. Say ‘‘Next phone’’ after the
prompts.

1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.

To delete a paired phone:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

3. HFL will read out all the paired
phone’s names.
To hear which paired phone is
currently linked:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’

3. HFL disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone.
4. Once another phone is found, it is
linked to the system. HFL will
inform you which phone is now
linked.

1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Status’’ after the prompts.
2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.
3. HFL will ask you which phone you
want to delete. Follow the HFL
prompts to continue with the
deletion.

3. HFL will tell you which phone is
linked to the system.

If no other phones are found or
paired, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.

361

2010 RL

Features

3. If there is more than one phone
paired to the system, HFL will ask
you which phone’s name you want
to change. Follow the HFL
prompts and rename the phone.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２４：５３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３６７

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To change the pairing code setting:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phone setup.’’

Making a Call
You can make calls using any phone
number or a name in the HFL
phonebook. You can also redial the
last number called.

To make a call using a phone
number:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’

2. Say ‘‘Set pairing code’’ after the
prompts.
3. If you want HFL to create a
random code each time you pair a
phone, say ‘‘Random.’’ If you want
to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say ‘‘Fixed’’
and follow the HFL prompts.

HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means, the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10
meters).
During a call, HFL allows you to talk
up to 30 minutes after you remove
the key from the ignition switch.
However, this may weaken the
vehicle’s battery.

362

2010 RL

2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the phone number you want to dial.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number and say
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the audio
speakers.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２５：０４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３６８

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To make a call using a name in the
HFL phonebook:

To make a call from an imported
phonebook:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
Features

2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name stored in the HFL
phonebook that you want to call.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the name and make the
call.
To redial the last number called by
HFL:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Redial.’’

1. Press the INFO button, then select
‘‘Cellular Phonebook .’’

3. Select a phonebook you want to
choose a phone number from.

2. Select ‘‘Search Imported
Phonebook .’’

If the phonebook you select is PINprotected, you will need to enter the
PIN to access it. See page 368 for
more information.

CONTINUED

363

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２５：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３６９

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Receiving a Call
When you receive a call, an incoming
call notification (if activated) will
play and interrupt the audio system
if it is on.

List option

Press the HFL Talk button to answer
the call, or the HFL Back button to
hang up.
Call Waiting

If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the HFL Talk button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
To search for a specific name in the
phonebook, enter the keyword for
either the first or last name.
To display all names in the
phonebook, select the ‘‘List ’’ option.

4. Select the name. All the phone
numbers stored for that name will
be listed.
5. Select the phone number, and
HFL begins dialing.
If you choose ‘‘Store in
HandsFreeLink,’’ the phone
number will be stored in HFL, so
that you can call it using HFL’s name
tag by voice.

364

2010 RL

To return to the original call, press
the HFL Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HFL Back button.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２５：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３７０

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Transferring a Call
You can transfer a call from HFL to
your phone, or from your phone to
HFL.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Transfer.’’

To send a name or number during a
call:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

Phonebook
You can store up to 50 names with
their associated numbers in HFL.
The numbers you store cannot only
be phone numbers but other types,
such as account numbers or
passwords, which can be sent during
a menu-driven call.
To store a phonebook entry:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say ‘‘Send.’’
To mute your voice during a call,
press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Mute.’’
To unmute your voice, press and
release the HFL Talk button and say
‘‘Mute’’ again.

1. Say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
2. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name or number you want to
send.
3. Follow the HFL prompts to send
the tones and continue the call.
NOTE: To send a pound (＃), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

2. Say ‘‘Store’’ after the prompts.
3. Say a name you want to list as your
phonebook entry.
4. Say the number you want to store
for the name entry.
5. Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘Enter’’ to store the entry.
CONTINUED

365

2010 RL

Features

Muting a Call
You can mute your voice to the
person you are talking to during a
call.

Send Numbers or Names During
a Call
HFL allows you to send numbers or
names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
system.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２５：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３７１

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
NOTE:
Avoid using duplicate name
entries.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name
entry.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
multisyllabic or longer name. For
example, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of
‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of
‘‘John.’’

To edit the number stored in a name:

To delete a name:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’

2. Say ‘‘Edit ’’ after the prompts.

2. Say ‘‘Delete’’ after the prompts.

3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name entry you want to edit.

3. Say the name you want to delete
and follow the HFL prompts to
complete the deletion.

4. When asked, say the new number
for that name.
5. Follow the HFL prompts to
complete the edit.

366

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２５：５６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３７２

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To list all names in the phonebook:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Phonebook .’’

To store a specific phone number
from your cell phone directly to the
HFL phonebook (available on some
phones):

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

Cellular Phonebook
(available on some phones)

If you select Cellular Phonebook
from the Information screen menu,
you will see four HFL options.

2. Say ‘‘List ’’ after the prompts.

4. If you hear a name you want to call,
immediately press the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘Call.’’

2. Say ‘‘Receive contact ’’ after the
prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a
number from your cell phone, and
send it to HFL.

For a list of cell phones that are
compatible with this feature:
In the U.S., visit www.acura.com/
handsfreelink , or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
(866) 78-ACURA.

4. Follow the HFL prompts and
name the number, or say
‘‘Discard’’ if it is not the number
you want to store.
5. Follow the HFL prompts if you
want to store another number.
CONTINUED

367

2010 RL

Features

1. Say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
3. HFL begins reading the names in
the order they were stored.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２６：０６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３７３

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Import Cellular Phonebook:

Search Imported Phonebook:

The entire phonebook data of the
cell phone that is linked to HFL can
be imported to the navigation system.

Once a phonebook has been
imported, you can search the phone
numbers by the person’s name.
PIN ICON

IMPORTED
PHONEBOOK

Select ‘‘Import Cellular
Phonebook ,’’ and HFL will begin
importing the phonebook. Select
‘‘OK ’’ after the import is completed.

If the phonebook is PIN-protected,
you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN.
IMPORTED DATE

Select ‘‘Search Cellular
Phonebook ,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
Select a phonebook from the list.

368

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２６：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３７４

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

List option

To display all names in the
phonebook, select the ‘‘List ’’ option.

Preference

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Voice

Work

Other

Delete Imported Phonebook:

You can delete any imported
phonebook.
Select ‘‘Delete Imported
Phonebook ,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
Select a phonebook you want to
delete. If the phonebook is PINprotected, you will need to enter the
4-digit PIN number.

Pager

These category icons indicate how
many numbers are stored for the
name. If a name has more than three
category icons, ‘‘…’’ is displayed.
Select the person’s number you want
to call, and press the HFL Talk
button.
CONTINUED

369

2010 RL

Features

To search for a specific name in the
phonebook, enter the keyword for
either the first or last name.

Select a person from the list. Up to
three category icons are displayed in
the left side of the list:

０９／０４／０２ １９：２６：２８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３７５

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
After making a selection, the
following screen will appear.

Select ‘‘Yes,’’ then ‘‘OK ’’ to complete
the deletion.

PIN Number
You can add, change, or remove a
PIN number from any phonebook.

To change the PIN to a new number:

Select the phonebook you want. The
display will change as shown above.
To add a PIN:

If you have selected a phonebook
without a PIN, you will see the above
display.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You will
have to re-enter the PIN for
confirmation.

370

2010 RL

Enter the current PIN for this
phonebook.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２６：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３７６

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To remove a PIN:

Select ‘‘PIN number,’’ then select
‘‘Do not use PIN’’ after you enter
the current PIN.

System Setup
This command group allows you to
change or customize HFL basic
settings.

Features

The display will change as shown
above.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.
You will be asked to re-enter the PIN
for verification.

CONTINUED

371

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２６：４８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３７７

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the
HFL system for security purposes:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

To change your security pass code:

To select either a ring tone or a
prompt as the incoming call
notification＊:

1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Security’’after the prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the 4-digit passcode you want to
set.
4. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.

2. Say ‘‘Change passcode’’ after the
prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
the new 4-digit passcode.
4. Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.

NOTE: Once a passcode is set, you
will need to enter it to use HFL each
time you start the vehicle. If you
forget the code, your dealer will have
to reset it for you, or you will have to
clear the entire system (see page
373 ).

1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’
2. Say ‘‘Call notification’’ after the
prompts.
3. Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘Ring tone’’ or ‘‘Prompt .’’ You
can also say ‘‘Off ’’ for no audible
incoming call notification.
＊: The default setting is a ring tone.

372

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２７：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３７８

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Quick Language Selection
Canadian models only
To quickly change the language:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say the language you want to
change to in that language.

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.

1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’

2. Follow the HFL prompts.

1. Say ‘‘System setup.’’

2. Say ‘‘Clear’’ after the prompts.

2. Say ‘‘Auto transfer’’ after the
prompts.

3. Follow the HFL prompts to
continue to complete the clearing
procedure.

If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position.

3. HFL will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on
the previous setting. Follow the
HFL prompts to change the
setting.

Features

To clear the system:

This operation clears the passcodes,
paired phones, all names in the HFL
phonebook, and all imported
phonebook data.

To activate or deactivate the auto
transfer function:

You can also clear the system when
you have forgotten the passcode and
cannot access HFL. When HFL asks
you for the passcode, say ‘‘System
clear.’’ Paired phones, all names in
the HFL phonebook and all imported
phonebook data will be lost.

373

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２７：０９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３７９

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Change Language
Canadian models only
To change the system language
between English and French:

Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
1. Say ‘‘Change language.’’

Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.

2. Follow the HFL prompts to
change the language to English or
French.

If you have not named your paired
phone in the language you just
selected, HFL will ask you to name it
in the current language.

When French is your currently
selected language, you can give voice
commands in French.

374

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２７：１５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３８０

Rearview Camera and Monitor
On models with navigation system

Since the rearview camera display
area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.

Features

REARVIEW CAMERA

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rearview is shown
on the navigation system screen.
For the best picture, always keep the
rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.

375

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２７：１７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３８１

376

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２７：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３８２

Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 378
Fuel Recommendation .................. 378
Service Station Procedures .......... 379
Refueling..................................... 379
Tighten Fuel Cap Message ...... 381
Opening and Closing
the Hood ................................. 381
Oil Check .................................... 383
Engine Coolant Check .............. 383
Fuel Economy ................................ 384
Accessories and Modifications .... 387
Carrying Cargo .............................. 389

377

2010 RL

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２７：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３８３

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.

Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on premium unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane of 91 or higher. If this
octane grade is unavailable, regular
unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane of 87 or higher may be used
temporarily. The use of regular
unleaded gasoline can cause metallic
knocking noises in the engine and
will result in decreased engine
performance. The long-term use of
regular-grade gasoline can lead to
engine damage.

Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.

378

2010 RL

We recommend quality gasolines
containing detergent additives that
help prevent fuel system and engine
deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２７：３９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３８４

Service Station Procedures
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.

Refueling
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.

Before Driving

Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flames
away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.

If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information for your vehicle, or
information on gasoline that does not
contain MMT, contact your dealer or
visit My Acura at owners.acura.com
(In Canada, visit www.myacura.ca).

Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.

FUEL FILL CAP

2. Open the fuel fill door by pressing
the button in the driver’s door (to
open the fuel fill door manually,
see page 503 ).
TETHER

CONTINUED

379

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２７：４５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３８５

Service Station Procedures
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank equalizes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the multiinformation display, and the
malfunction indicator lamp may
also come on (see page 501 ).
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.

380

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２７：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３８６

Service Station Procedures
Tighten Fuel Cap Message

If the system still detects a leak in
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 501 .

Opening and Closing the Hood
HOOD RELEASE LEVER

1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release lever located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.

CONTINUED

381

2010 RL

Before Driving

Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display. Turn the engine off, and
confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If
it is, loosen it, then retighten it until
it clicks at least once. The message
should go off after several days of
normal driving once you tighten or

replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to
another message, press the INFO
button. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２７：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３８７

Service Station Procedures

LATCH

2. Reach between the hood and the
front bumper with your finger.
Slide the latch handle up.

3. Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
up the rest of the way and hold it
up.

If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.

382

2010 RL

To close the hood, lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then firmly press down on
the front edge of the hood. Make
sure it is securely latched.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２８：０９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３８８

Service Station Procedures
Oil Check

Engine Coolant Check

DIPSTICK

RESERVE TANK

LOWER MARK

Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.

4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower
mark, see Adding Engine Oil on
page 452 .

3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.

MAX
MIN

Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 455 .
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 446 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.

383

2010 RL

Before Driving

UPPER MARK

０９／０４／０２ １９：２８：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３８９

Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
City MPG − Represents urban
driving in light traffic. A range of
miles per gallon achieved is also
provided.
Highway MPG − Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon

City MPG

Highway MPG

Combined Fuel
Economy

Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

achieved is also provided.
Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles in the
U.S. or 20,000 km in Canada per year

384

2010 RL

multiplied by the cost per gallon
(based on EPA fuel cost data)
divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit www.
fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
vehicles.gc.ca)

０９／０４／０２ １９：２８：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３９０

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy
Vehicle Maintenance

A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the multiinformation display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 446 ).
For example:

Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
452).
Maintain proper tire inflation
− An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle − It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.

Observe the speed limit −
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel economy at speeds above
45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible − If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Avoid excessive idling − Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
per liter).

Drive Efficiently

Drive moderately − Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
CONTINUED

385

2010 RL

Before Driving

Fuel Economy Factors
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
are more efficient when warmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires

０９／０４／０２ １９：２８：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３９１

Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Miles
driven

Gallons
of fuel

Miles per
Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques

Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).

1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.

386

2010 RL

L per
100 km

０９／０４／０２ １９：２８：４９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３９２

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Acura accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
any accessories, be sure to read the
following information.

Although non-Acura accessories may
fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.

Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.

Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 504 ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer. If possible,
have your dealer inspect the final
installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.

387

2010 RL

Before Driving

Accessories
Your dealer has Acura accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:

０９／０４／０２ １９：２８：５５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３９３

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with nonAcura components could seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling,
stability, and reliability.
Here are some examples:
Lowering the vehicle with a nonAcura suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.

Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety systems could make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.

Raising your vehicle with a nonAcura suspension kit can affect
the handling and stability.
Non-Acura wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).

388

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２９：０４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３９４

Carrying Cargo

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

FRONT DOOR POCKET

CENTER POCKET

Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Console compartment
Center pocket
Trunk

However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.

TRUNK

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

GLOVE BOX

389

2010 RL

Before Driving

In addition, the trunk pass-through
allows you to carry longer items.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２９：１６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３９５

Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Label Example

This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.

Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit −
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.

390

2010 RL

(4)The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２９：２１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３９６

Carrying Cargo

Example 1
Max Load (850 lbs)

Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)

Cargo Weight
(550 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)

Cargo Weight
(250 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)

Cargo Weight
(100 lbs)

In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
Before Driving

Example 2

Example 3

391

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２９：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３９７

Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the pedals or seat operation.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Rack
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 56 .
If you carry any items on a roof
rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed 121 lbs (55 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information
that came with your roof rack.

392

2010 RL

If you carry any items extending
through the trunk pass-through,
tie down or secure all items that
could be thrown around the
vehicle and hurt someone during a
crash or sudden stop.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２９：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３９８

Carrying Cargo
Cargo Hooks
SIDE CARGO HOOKS

CARGO FLOOR HOOKS

Before Driving

There are hooks on the floor and
both sides of the trunk. They can be
used to install the cargo net for
securing items. The side cargo
hooks are designed to hold light
items (maximum load: 6 lbs or 3 kgs
for each hook). Heavy objects may
damage the side hooks.

The cargo floor hooks can also be
used to tie down and secure items on
the floor.

393

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２９：３８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０３９９

394

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：２９：４１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４００

Driving
Preparing to Drive ......................... 396
Starting the Engine........................ 397
Check Starting System
Message .................................. 398
Automatic Transmission............... 399
Driving with the Paddle
Shifters.................................... 403
D-Paddle Shift Mode ................. 403
Sequential Shift Mode ............... 405
Super Handling-All Wheel DriveTM
(SH-AWD ) System .................. 407
Parking ............................................ 409
Braking System.............................. 410
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 411
Collision Mitigation Brake
System (CMBS) ......................... 413
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ......................... 423
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System ......... 429
Towing a Trailer ............................ 431
Towing Your Vehicle .................... 436

395

2010 RL

Driving

This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the Super Handling-All
Wheel DriveTM (SH-AWD ) system,
the vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system, the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), the collision
mitigation brake system (CMBS),
and facts you need if you are
planning to tow a trailer.

０９／０４／０２ １９：２９：５１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４０１

Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.

5. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 156 ).
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 161 ).
7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 148 ).

2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page 475 ).
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.

8. Make sure the doors and the
trunk are securely closed and
locked.
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 17 ).
10.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages on the multi-information
display (see pages 61 , 70 and
78 ).

396

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３０：００ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４０２

Starting the Engine
Your vehicle’s starting system has an
auto control mode. When you turn
the ignition switch to the START
(III) position, this feature keeps the
engine’s starter motor running until
the engine starts. Follow these
instructions to start the engine:

seconds until the engine starts.
If you hold the ignition switch in
the START (III) position for more
than 7 seconds, the starter motor,
depending on the outside
temperature, runs for about 10 to
25 seconds until the engine starts.

1. Apply the parking brake.

3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, then
release the ignition switch. You do
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. Depending on
the outside temperature, the
starter motor runs for about 6 to 9

The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 151 .

6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.

The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.

397

2010 RL

Driving

2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.

If the engine does not start, wait at
least 10 seconds before trying
again.

5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３０：０５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４０３

Starting the Engine
Check Starting System Message

If this message is on, the ignition
switch has to be held in the
START (III) position manually
until the engine starts. The
ignition switch can be held in that
position up to 15 seconds.
Even though you may be able to
start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starting
system, have your dealer inspect
your vehicle.

If there is a problem with the
starting system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON (II) position. You
will also see this message when the
auto control mode of the starting
system has a problem.

398

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３０：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４０４

Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.

Shifting

These indicators between the
tachometer and speedometer show
which position the shift lever is in.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
79 ).

To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal, and
press the release button on the top
of the shift lever, then move the
lever. You cannot shift out of Park
when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.

CONTINUED

399

2010 RL

Driving

If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３０：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４０５

Automatic Transmission

To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to S
S to D
D to N
N to D
R to N

Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.

Move the shift lever.

Park (P) − This position
mechanically locks the transmission.
Use Park whenever you are turning
off or starting the engine. To shift
out of Park, you must press on the
brake pedal and have your foot off
the accelerator pedal. Press the
release button on the top of the shift
lever to move it.

If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 401 .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position, or remove
the built-in key from the ignition
switch.
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and press the release button to
shift from Park to reverse. To shift
from reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.

400

2010 RL

Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The transmission automatically adjusts to keep
the engine at the best speed for the
driving conditions.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３０：２８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４０６

Automatic Transmission
S Position (S) − To shift into the S
position, press the release button on
the front of the shift lever, and move
the lever to S. This position is similar
to D, except only gears from first to
fourth are selected. The S position
keeps the transmission from cycling
between fourth and fifth gears in
stop-and-go driving.

Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.

Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) position.
Driving

With the shift lever in D or S, you
can also use the paddle shifters to
shift the transmission up or down.
Once you begin to use the paddle
shifters in S, the transmission will no
longer upshift or downshift
automatically. For more information
of driving with the paddle shifters,
see page 403 .

CONTINUED

401

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３０：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４０７

Automatic Transmission
6. Remove the built-in key from the
shift lock release slot, then
reinstall the cover. Make sure the
notch on the cover is on the driver’s
side. Press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
COVER

3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover next to the
shift lever. Use a small flat-tip
screwdriver or a metal fingernail
file to remove the cover. Carefully
pry on the edge of the cover.

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

4. Insert the built-in key into the shift
lock release slot.
5. Push down on the built-in key
while you press the release button
and move the shift lever out of
Park to neutral.

402

2010 RL

０９／０４／０３ １６：１４：２３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４０８

Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Using the Paddle Shifters in the
D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)
When you are driving in the D
position, pulling either paddle shifter
switches from the ordinary
automatic transmission [drive mode
(D)] to the D-paddle shift mode. You
can shift the transmission up or
down manually with the paddle
shifters.

Each time you pull ＋ (right), the
transmission shifts to a higher gear.
Pull − (left) to downshift. You will
see the selected gear number on the
instrument panel.
GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

Driving

Downshifting gives you more power
when climbing, and provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill.

PADDLE SHIFTERS

To shift up or down, use the ＋
(right) or − (left) paddle shifter on
either side of the steering wheel.
When you pull either paddle shifter,
the gear position indicator shows you
the selected gear number.

CONTINUED

403

2010 RL

０９／０４／０３ １６：１４：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４０９

Driving with the Paddle Shifters
The transmission control system
monitors the accelerator pedal use
and your driving conditions. When
you press the accelerator pedal as in
normal driving, the system judges
that you are driving at a constant
cruising speed without using the
paddle shifters. Under these
conditions, D-paddle shift mode is
canceled, and the transmission
automatically returns to drive mode
(D).
When the transmission returns to
drive mode (D), the displayed gear
number disappears.
The transmission remains in the
selected gear if you do not accelerate.
Each time you pull either paddle
shifter, the transmission shifts one
gear up or down. If you want to shift
up or down more than two gears, pull
the paddle shifter twice, pause, and
then pull it again.

The automatic transmission will not
allow you to shift up or down if:
You downshift before the engine
speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower gear.
If you try to do this, the gear
position indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
times, then return to a higher gear.
You upshift before the engine
speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher gear.
You pull both paddle shifters at
the same time.
You pull one of the two paddle
shifters with another paddle
shifter being pressed.

404

2010 RL

The transmission downshifts to first
gear and returns to drive mode (D)
when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop and the vehicle speed
is about 9 mph (15 km/h).
If there is a problem in the
transmission while you are driving
with the paddle shifters, the D
indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift
mode is canceled, and the
transmission returns to drive mode
(D).

０９／０４／０３ １６：１４：４７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４１０

Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Using the Paddle Shifters in the S
position (Sequential Shift Mode)
With the shift lever in the S position,
you can select the sequential shift
mode to shift gears; much like a
manual transmission using the
paddle shifters, but without a clutch
pedal.

‘‘M’’ INDICATOR

When you move the shift lever from
‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ position and pull either
paddle shifter, the gear position
indicator displays ‘‘M’’ along with the
selected gear number.
To upshift, pull the ＋ (right) paddle
shifter. To downshift, pull the −
(left) paddle shifter.

When you accelerate from a stop,
the transmission starts in first gear,
and you must manually upshift
between first and fifth gears. Make
sure you upshift before the engine
speed reaches the tachometer’s red
zone.
The transmission remains in the
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There
is no automatic downshift when you
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor.
When you are driving in 4th or 5th
gear, the transmission downshifts to
the lower gear under the following
conditions:
The vehicle slows down to a
certain speed.
You press the brake pedal.
CONTINUED

405

2010 RL

Driving

To enter the sequential shift mode,
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, move the lever to
the S position, then pull either paddle
shifter. To cancel the sequential shift
mode and return to the ordinary
automatic transmission, move the
shift lever from the S position. When
moving the shift lever, be careful not
to operate incorrectly. While you are
driving in the sequential shift mode,
the transmission will not
automatically return to ordinary
automatic transmission.

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

０９／０４／０３ １６：１４：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４１１

Driving with the Paddle Shifters
Downshifting with the paddle shifter
allows you to increase the engine
braking when going down steep or
long hills, and provides more power
when climbing uphills. You can
upshift the transmission manually to
reduce the rpm.
The transmission also shifts
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It downshifts to first
gear when the vehicle speed reaches
9 mph (15 km/h) or less.

The automatic transmission will not
allow you to shift up or down if:
You downshift before the engine
speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower gear.
If you try to do this, the gear
position indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
times, then return to a higher gear.
Also, you cannot upshift with the
paddle shifter before the engine
speed reaches the lower limit of
the higher gear.
You try to shift to third or a higher
gear when the vehicle is stationary.
You pull both paddle shifters at
the same time.
You pull one of the two paddle
shifters with another paddle
shifter being pressed.

406

2010 RL

Here are the speed ranges for
upshifting and downshifting.
To Shift
from

Speed range

1→2

over 0 mph (0 km/h)

2→3

over 9 mph (15 km/h)

3→4

over 17 mph (27 km/h)

4→5

over 38 mph (60 km/h)

To Shift
from

Speed range

5 → 4 under 131 mph (210 km/h)
4→3

under 94 mph (150 km/h)

3→2

under 63 mph (100 km/h)

2→1

under 31 mph (50 km/h)

０９／０４／０２ １９：３１：１７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４１２

Super Handling-All Wheel DriveTM (SH-AWD ) System
Starting in Second Gear

When you are in sequential shift
mode, and the vehicle is stopped,
pull the ＋ (right) paddle shifter to
shift to second gear. You will see
‘‘M2’’ in the display. Starting in
second gear helps to reduce
wheelspin in deep snow or on a
slippery surface.

The super handling-all wheel drive
(SH-AWD) system is a full time allwheel-drive system that
automatically controls and transfers
varying amounts of engine torque to
all wheels independently, according
to the driving conditions.

TORQUE INDICATOR

Driving

While the SH-AWD system helps to
enhance the vehicle’s driving
stability in all situations, it is still
your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.

SH-AWD Torque Distribution
Monitor

TORQUE INDICATOR

The SH-AWD torque distribution
monitor on the multi-information
display shows you the amount of
torque being sent to the wheels.
Each wheel − right front (RF), left
front (LF), right rear (RR), and left
rear (LR) − has its own torque
indicator.
CONTINUED

407

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３１：２２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４１３

Super Handling-All Wheel DriveTM (SH-AWD ) System
Each torque indicator is displayed as
a bar graph divided into 5 segments.
The number of segments represents
the amount of torque distributed to
each wheel.
When there is only a slight change in
torque distribution while driving,
such as cruising on level roads at the
same speed, the torque distribution
monitor may stop displaying the
amount of torque. This is not a
system problem. The monitor will
show the amount if the system
senses any change in torque
distribution.

If the SH-AWD indicator blinks while
driving, it indicates the differential
temperature is too high. You will also
see an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF TEMP.
HIGH’’ message on the multiinformation display. If this happens,
pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out. If
the indicator does not go out, take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked.

408

2010 RL

If the SH-AWD indicator on the
instrument panel stays on, and the
‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
message also appears on the multiinformation display, there is problem
with the SH-AWD system.
Your vehicle still has normal frontwheel drive with vehicle stability
assist (VSA), but does not have the
advantages of SH-AWD. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon
as possible.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３１：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４１４

Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly or
your vehicle may roll if it is on an
incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.

Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.

Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.

409

2010 RL

Driving

If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３１：３８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４１５

Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The brake pedal
assist function increases the force
you apply to the brake pedal during
an emergency stop. When the brake
pedal assist is activated, the epretensioners (if equipped) tighten
front seat belts (see page 24 ). The
anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard (see page 411 ).

Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.

Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.

410

2010 RL

Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３１：４５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４１６

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.

ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
When the ABS indicator comes on,
you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display.

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

CONTINUED

411

2010 RL

Driving

The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３１：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４１７

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.

Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with steering
control during braking.

Test your brakes as instructed on
page 502 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.

ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.

The VSA indicator will come on
along with the ABS indicator.

ABS cannot prevent the loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.

412

2010 RL

A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３１：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４１８

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)
Overview
If equipped

RADAR SENSOR

When the CMBS activates, the brake
lights also come on.
BRAKE
ACTUATOR

SEAT BELT
e-PRETENSIONERS

The CMBS consists of a radar
sensor in the front grille, a brake
actuator in the engine compartment,
an indicator on the instrument panel,
seat belt e-pretensioners on the front
seats, and an on/off switch on the
dashboard.

When your speed is above 10 mph
(15 km/h), the CMBS radar
sensor in the front grille can sense
a vehicle ahead of you. When your
vehicle gets too close to the
vehicle ahead of you, the system
may activate a warning beep,
causing automatic application of
the brakes, and causing the
e-pretensioners to tighten the
front seat belts (see page 24 ).

413

2010 RL

Driving

The collision mitigation brake
system (CMBS) can assist you when
there is a possibility of your vehicle
hitting the vehicle in front of you. It
is designed to reduce the speed of
your vehicle before an unavoidable
collision occurs and, if possible, to
alert you to a potential collision while
there is time to prevent it. Here is a
brief description of what the CMBS
can do:

The CMBS does not activate if the
speed difference between the two
vehicles is less than 10 mph (15
km/h). CMBS may also not
activate if you turn the steering
wheel to avoid the collision.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３２：０６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４１９

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)
Radar Sensor
BOLTS
(Do not tamper)

If the radar sensor cover or the radar
sensor ever needs to be removed,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

RADAR SENSOR COVER

The radar sensor is located under
the Acura emblem in the front grille.
If the radar sensor cover is covered
with mud, dirt, dead leaves, wet
snow, etc., or if you put a sticker on
it, the CMBS will automatically shut
off, and the CMBS indicator on the
instrument panel will come on. You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK CMBS
RADAR SENSOR’’ message on the
multi-information display for about 5
seconds.

Do not allow anything to impact the
radar sensor or the radar sensor
cover. If either of these parts
receives a strong impact, turn off the
system by pressing the CMBS off
switch, and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. If the front
grille ever needs to be repaired,
consult a dealer first.

Always keep the radar sensor cover
clean. If it gets dirty, clean it with
water or a mild detergent. Never use
chemical solvents or polishing
powder.
There are three bolts on the sides of
the radar sensor. Do not tamper with
these bolts, or you may cause the
system to malfunction.

414

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３２：１０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４２０

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

When the CMBS is on, the radar sensor
constantly scans f or vehicles ahead of
you. This means that driving on a road
with a f ew or no vehicles could cause a
CHECK CMBS RADAR SENSOR
message to appear on the multiinf ormation display. This is normal
and not a cause f or concern.

The radar sensor may not always
scan as intended. Here are two
examples:

Driving

Your vehicle is tilted because of a
heavy load in the rear or from
modifications to the suspension.
Do not overload your vehicle (see
Carrying Cargo on page 389 ), and
do not make any modifications to
the suspension (see Accessories
and Modifications on page 387 ).
The tires are not correctly
maintained. Always make sure the
tire pressures are correct (see
page 474 ), and that the tires are
the correct size and in good
condition (see Tires on page 474 ).

415

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３２：１７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４２１

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)
Collision Alarm

CMBS OFF Switch
CMBS OFF SWITCH

If the system senses a likely collision
with a vehicle or object ahead of you,
it alerts you with an audible and a
visual alarm.

The audible alarm is a constant
beeping sound; the visual alert is an
amber colored BRAKE message that
flashes on the multi-information
display. If these alarms come on,
take the appropriate means to
prevent a collision (apply the brakes,
change lanes, etc.).

416

2010 RL

To turn the CMBS off, press the
CMBS OFF switch on the dashboard
for about 1 second. When you do this,
a beeper sounds, a CMBS indicator
on the instrument panel comes on,
and a CMBS OFF message appears
on the multi-information display. To
turn the system back on, press the
switch again for about 1 second.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３２：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４２２

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the CMBS is
turned on if it was on previously.

Automatic Shut Off
Any of the conditions below can
cause the CMBS to shut off. When
the system shuts off, the CMBS
indicator in the instrument panel
comes on, and a CHECK CMBS
SYSTEM message appears on the
multi-information display for about 5
seconds.

The CMBS will automatically
recover when these conditions are
improved.

Driving

An abnormal tire condition is
detected (wrong tire size, flat tire,
etc.).
Extended off-road or mountainous
driving.
Driving your vehicle with the
parking brake applied.
Driving your vehicle in bad
weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
A dirty emblem on the front grille.

417

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３２：３３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４２３

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)
CMBS Indicator

The CMBS indicator normally comes
on under these conditions:

When the VSA system indicator
comes on (see page 429 ).

CMBS INDICATOR

When you manually turn off the
system.
When the system shuts off
automatically.
When you drive in bad weather
(rain, snow, fog, etc.).

This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It also
comes on and stays on when you
turn the CMBS off by pressing the
CMBS OFF switch.

If anything covers the front grille
(dirt, mud, dry leaves, wet snow,
etc.).

To turn the CMBS back on, make
sure the vehicle is stopped and the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position, then press the CMBS OFF
switch for about 1 second.

418

2010 RL

When you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position, the CMBS
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go off. If the
indicator comes on at any other
time and a CHECK CMBS
SYSTEM message appears on the
multi-information display, there is
a problem with the CMBS. You
can still drive your vehicle, but
CMBS will not be operating. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３２：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４２４

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)
Limitations
The CMBS may not activate under
some conditions. Here are a few
examples:

YOUR VEHICLE

The distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead of you is too
short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a
slow speed.
Driving

A vehicle cuts in front of you and
brakes suddenly.

Driving in heavy, stop-and-go
traffic.

When you accelerate rapidly and
approach the vehicle ahead of you
at high speed.

The vehicle ahead of you is a
motorcycle or other small vehicle.

Immediately after you drive off.

CONTINUED

419

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３２：５０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４２５

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

YOUR VEHICLE

The CMBS is not designed to detect
pedestrians.
Even with little or no chance of a
collision, the CMBS may activate
under these conditions:
When you change lanes quickly,
then overtake the vehicle ahead of
you.
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front
of you.

When you approach or pass a
vehicle ahead of you that is
turning left or right in an
intersection.

420

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３２：５８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４２６

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)
YOUR VEHICLE

LOW BRIDGE

RAILS

When you pass a low bridge at
high speed.

When you approach train tracks at
the bottom of a hill and you do not
apply the brakes.

When you go over a sharp-edged
speed bump at high speed.
When you go over areas of
construction on the road surface.

Because of the road condition
(curved, winding, etc.) or the state of
your vehicle (turning angle, lane
position, etc.), CMBS can sometimes
mistake a stationary object (light
pole, traffic sign, etc.) as a vehicle
ahead of you and temporarily
operate. This is normal.

421

2010 RL

Driving

SIGN, POLE, etc.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３３：０３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４２７

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)
Important Safety Reminder
The main purpose of the CMBS is to
reduce the severity of injuries
caused by an unavoidable collision.
While the CMBS may help to alert
you and minimize the severity of a
collision, it may not activate in every
dangerous situation.
Even with the CMBS, it is still your
responsibility to operate the brake
pedal and steering wheel
appropriately, according to the
driving conditions.

422

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３３：１２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４２８

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.

Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.

For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
you check and adjust your tire
pressure in cooler conditions, and
drive into extremely hot conditions,
the tire may become overinflated.
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
the tires are overinflated.
Refer to page 474 for tire inflation
guidelines.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
minute, then stays on. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 427 ).
CONTINUED

423

2010 RL

Driving

Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrumental panel and the
appropriate tire position indicator on
the tire pressure monitor on the
multi-information display (see page
425 ) to come on.

Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
When the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator is on, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
The multi-information display also
shows a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message (see page 425 ). You should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure as indicated on the
vehicle’s tire information placard.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３３：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４２９

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when the
vehicle is cold, and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as
specified on the vehicle placard and
in the owner’s manual (see page
474 ).
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the recommended
pressure.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 488 ).

Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS and tire monitor
indicators will come on. Replace the
indicated flat tire with the compact
spare tire (see page 489 ).
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on while
driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on again.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. This is normal;
the system cannot monitor the spare
tire pressure. Manually check the
spare tire pressure to be sure it is
correct.
This indicator and the warning
message on the multi-information
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified

424

2010 RL

regular tire equipped with the tire
pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
a qualified technician.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３３：２７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４３０

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitor
VEHICLE ICON

When any of the tires has low
pressure, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘TIRE PRESSURE
ERROR SYSTEM FUNCTION
NORMAL’’ message (see page 76 ).

If there is a system error with the
TPMS, the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION
ERROR’’ message (see page 79 ),
and the tire pressure readings will
not be displayed. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display (see
page 427 ).

If any of the tires have low pressure,
the multi-information display will
show a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message. You will also see one or
more low pressure tire positions
blinking in the display (see page
79 ).

CONTINUED

425

2010 RL

Driving

When all tire pressures are normal,
the multi-information display will
show ‘‘TIRE PRESSURE OK
SYSTEM FUNCTION NORMAL.’’

０９／０４／０２ １９：３３：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４３１

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator and the low tire position on
the low tire pressure monitor do not
go out after inflating the tires to the
specified values, have your dealer
check the system as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Readings
U.S.

CANADA

When the TPMS is functioning
normally, you can see the tire
pressure readings of each tire in psi
(U.S. models) or kPa (Canadian
models) by pressing the SEL/
RESET button while the multiinformation display shows the tire
pressure monitor.

426

2010 RL

If one or more tires have low
pressure, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator on the instrument
panel also comes on (see page 423 ).
When cruise control is on while
driving, the pressure reading cannot
be checked by the tire pressure
monitor on the multi-information
display.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３３：４１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４３２

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
It is possible that the pressures
shown on the multi-information
display and the pressures you
manually measure are slightly
different.

Check TPMS System Message

If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the multi-information display shows
a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message.
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator begins to flash (see page
67 ).

If you see this message, the tire
pressure monitor shows a ‘‘SYSTEM
FUNCTION ERROR’’ message. The
system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended.
Also, the tire pressure readings will
not be displayed. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
CONTINUED

427

2010 RL

Driving

If the difference is significant or you
cannot make the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator and message on the
multi-information display go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３３：４６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４３３

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, or the multiinformation display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,
the VSA system automatically turns
on even when the VSA system is
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch (see page 430 ). If this
happens, you cannot turn the VSA
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again.
When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.

428

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３３：５５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４３４

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.

The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink (see
page 65 ).

If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible (see page 65 ).

VSA System Indicator
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.

When the VSA system indicator
comes on, you will also see a
‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ message
on the multi-information display.
Without VSA, your vehicle still has
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it does not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.

NOTE: The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.

429

2010 RL

Driving

When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.

VSA Activation Indicator

０９／０４／０２ １９：３４：０４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４３５

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on (see page 423 ),
or the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message with the indicator flashing
(see page 427 ), the VSA system
automatically turns on even if the
VSA system is turned off with the
VSA OFF switch. In this case, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
VSA OFF Switch
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.

Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
VSA OFF SWITCH

When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 479 ).

This switch is at the right side of the
left vent. Press and hold it until you
hear a beep.

430

2010 RL

If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３４：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４３６

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.

Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.

Total Trailer Weight: The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy
can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.

Tongue Load: The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too much tongue
load reduces front-tire traction and
steering control. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
CONTINUED

431

2010 RL

Driving

Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.

Load Limits

０９／０４／０２ １９：３４：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４３７

Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60% of the load
toward the front of the trailer and
40% toward the rear, then re-adjust
the load as needed.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load is: 4,980 lbs (2,260 kg)
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle axles are: 2,680 lbs
(1,215 kg) on the front axle, and
2,380 lbs (1,080 kg) on the rear
axle.

Checking Loads
The best way to confirm that all
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale. For public
scales in your area, check your local
phone book, or contact your trailer
dealer or rental agency for
assistance.
If you cannot get to a public scale,
you can estimate the total trailer
weight by adding the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the
manufacturer) with everything in or
on the trailer.
If you normally pull the same load
each time you tow a trailer, you can
use a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge to check the
tongue load the first time you set up
a towing combination (a fully loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.

432

2010 RL

Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment,
depending on the size of your trailer,
how much load you are towing, and
where you tow. To ensure the best
quality, we recommend that you
purchase Acura equipment
whenever possible.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and maintained,
and that it meets federal, state,
province, and local regulations.
Hitches

Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３４：２８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４３８

Towing a Trailer
Safety Chains

Trailer Brakes

Trailer Lights

Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.

There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.

Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state/province,
and local regulations. Check with
your local trailer sales or rental
agencies for the requirements in the
area where you plan to tow, and use
only equipment designed for your
vehicle.

See your trailer dealer or rental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.

Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.

CONTINUED

433

2010 RL

Driving

If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.

０９／０４／０３ １６：１５：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４３９

Towing a Trailer
Additional Towing Equipment

Many states and Canadian
provinces/territories require special
outside mirrors when towing a trailer.
Even if they don’t, you should install
special mirrors if you cannot clearly
see behind you, or if the trailer
creates a blind spot.
Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.

Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the suspension and
the cooling system are in good
operating condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition,
and the lights and brakes on the
trailer are working properly.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.

434

2010 RL

Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３４：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４４０

Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.

Making Turns and Braking

Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.

Driving

For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.

Towing Speeds and Gears

Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D position when towing a
trailer on level roads. See ‘‘Driving on
Hills’’ in the next column for
additional gear information. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higher
speeds, the trailer may sway or
affect vehicle handling.

CONTINUED

435

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３４：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４４１

Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle
Driving on Hills

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.

Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.

If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and shift down to S
position, or use the paddle shifters to
the lower gear (3, 2 or 1) in the S
position. When towing a trailer, do
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and remember,
it will take longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.

Backing Up

Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; turn the wheel to the left to
get the trailer to move to the left,
and turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking

Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.

436

2010 RL

Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page 513 .

０９／０４／０２ １９：３４：５７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４４２

Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the multi-information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.

437

2010 RL

Maintenance

If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 535 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.

Maintenance Safety ....................... 438
Maintenance Minder ..................... 439
Fluid Locations............................... 449
Engine Compartment Covers....... 450
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 452
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter ............................................ 453
Engine Coolant ............................... 455
Windshield Washers ..................... 458
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 458
Brake Fluid ..................................... 460
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 460
Timing Belt ..................................... 461
Lights .............................................. 462
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 470
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 470
Floor Mats ...................................... 471
Wiper Blades .................................. 472
Wheels ............................................ 474
Tires ................................................ 474
Checking the Battery .................... 483
Vehicle Storage .............................. 486

０９／０４／０２ １９：３５：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４４３

Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.

Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.

438

2010 RL

Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.

Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３５：１５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４４４

Maintenance Minder
One of the most convenient and
important features of the multiinformation display on your vehicle
is the maintenance minder.

Engine Oil Life Display

Based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life.
REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

To see the remaining engine oil life
displayed on the lower right corner
on the multi-information display as a
percentage, turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position, and press the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the engine oil
life appears (see page 73 ).

Calculated Engine
Displayed
Oil Life (%)
Engine Oil Life
(%)
100% − 91%
100%
90% − 81%
90%
80% − 71%
80%
70% − 61%
70%
60% − 51%
60%
50% − 41%
50%
40% − 31%
40%
30% − 21%
30%
20% − 16%
20%
15% − 11%
15%
10% − 6%
10%
5% − 1%
5%
0%
0%

CONTINUED

439

2010 RL

Maintenance

The system also displays the code
for other scheduled maintenance
items needing service.

The remaining engine oil life is
displayed according to the table
shown below.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３５：２１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４４５

Maintenance Minder
The message will be canceled if the
▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
to see the message again.

MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM

MESSAGE

MAINTENANCE
ITEM CODE(S)

MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEM(S)

When the remaining engine oil life is
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ message along with the
maintenance schedule code
indicating the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change.
Refer to page 447 and 448 for a
complete list of the maintenance
main items and sub items.

REMAINING
ENGINE OIL LIFE

Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘OIL LIFE’’ along with the
percentage of oil life remaining and
the maintenance item code(s),
appear on the lower part of the multiinformation display.

440

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３５：２７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４４６

Maintenance Minder
The message will be canceled if the
▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
to see the message again.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’, along with
‘‘5%’’, and the maintenance item
code(s) are displayed on the lower
part of the multi-information display
when the calculated engine oil life is
1 to 5 percent (see page 439 ).
CONTINUED

441

2010 RL

Maintenance

When the remaining engine oil life is
1 to 5 percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
NOW’’ message with the
maintenance items. When you see
this message have the indicated
maintenance performed as soon as
possible.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３５：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４４７

Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 447 ).
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. If the oil life minder is not
displayed, press the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel
repeatedly until it is.

To cancel resetting the oil life,
press the ▲ or ▼ button on the
steering wheel to select CANCEL
on the display, and press the SEL/
RESET button.

U.S.

If you do not complete the reset
procedure within 30 seconds after
selecting the reset mode, the mode
will be canceled automatically.

CANADA

3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
mode will be shown on the multiinformation display.
To reset the engine oil life, press
the ▼ or ▲ button on the steering
wheel to select RESET on the
display, and press the SEL/
RESET button.

442

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３５：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４４８

Maintenance Minder
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the oil life minder as previously
described.
The message will be canceled if the
▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
to see the message again.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life minder. The
message ‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’,
along with ‘‘0%’’, and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the lower part of the multiinformation display when the
calculated engine oil life is 0 percent.
CONTINUED

443

2010 RL

Maintenance

If the indicated maintenance service
is not done and the remaining engine
oil life reaches 0%, the multiinformation display will show the
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’
and the maintenance item code(s).
This message is displayed when the
total distance traveled is less than 10
miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for
Canadian models) after the engine
oil life became 0%.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３５：４９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４４９

Maintenance Minder
Also, the percentage ‘‘0’’ keeps
blinking on the display.
This particular message is displayed
when the mileage after the engine oil
life became 0% reaches 10 miles (for
U.S. models)/10 km (for Canadian
models).

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
U.S.

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
CANADA

If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0%, the multiinformation display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total distance traveled after the
remaining oil life became 0%, and the
maintenance item code(s).

444

2010 RL

This message is displayed again
when you drive over 10 miles (for
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
models) after seeing the 0% message.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as previously described.
The maximum total mileage shown
with this message is ‘‘9999 mile’’ (for
U.S. models) or ‘‘9999 km’’ (for
Canadian models).
The message will be canceled if the
▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
to see the message again.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３５：５６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４５０

Maintenance Minder

U.S.

This particular message is displayed
when you drive over 10 miles (for
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
models) after seeing 0%.

CANADA

The maximum total negative mileage
is ‘‘−9999 mile’’ (for U.S. models) or
‘‘−9999 km’’ (for Canadian models).

Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
performed but do not reset the
display, or reset the display without
performing the service, the system
will not show the proper
maintenance intervals. This can lead
to serious mechanical problems
because you will no longer have an
accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
Maintenance

When you press the SEL/RESET
button to select the engine oil life
minder, the message ‘‘SERVICE’’,
along with the maintenance item
code and the total negative mileage
after the oil life became 0 percent,
will be displayed on the lower part of
the multi-information display.

CONTINUED

445

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３６：０６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４５１

Maintenance Minder
Your authorized dealer knows your
vehicle best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all receipts
as proof of completion, and have the
person who does the work fill out
your Maintenance Journal or
Canadian Maintenance Log. Check
your warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Acura parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with ＃ will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Acura
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed in accordance
with the intervals indicated by the
multi-information display.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.

446

2010 RL

Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 383 .
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 383 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
458 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 460 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
474 .
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 462 .

０９／０４／０２ １９：３６：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４５２

Maintenance Minder
Symbol
A
B

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil＊
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and line (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system＃
Fuel lines and connections＃

＊ : If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 446.
NOTE:

Independent of the maintenance messages on the multi-information
display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

CONTINUED

447

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３６：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４５３

Maintenance Minder

Symbol
1
2

Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher
transmission and transfer temperatures.
This requires transmission and transfer fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your
vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
and transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles
(100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under
−20°F, −29°C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/
100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant

Symbol
6

448

2010 RL

Maintenance Sub Items
Replace rear differential fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires
differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you
regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles
(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

０９／０４／０２ １９：３６：２２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４５４

Fluid Locations

BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)

ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP

WASHER FLUID
(Black cap)

POWER STEERING
FLUID＊
(Red cap)

RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR

＊: The power steering fluid reservoir is located under the right compartment cover.

449

2010 RL

Maintenance

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)

０９／０４／０２ １９：３６：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４５５

Engine Compartment Covers
The component parts in the engine
compartment are protected by
several covers. You may need to
remove the covers when you
perform some simple maintenance
work.

FRONT BULKHEAD COVER

BATTERY COVER
CLIPS

CLIPS
CLIPS

All of the covers are secured by
holding clips.

KNOB

To remove the battery cover, turn
the knob of the fastener and remove
the holding clips by pushing on the
center of each fastener head.
Unlock
Lock

To remove the front bulkhead cover:
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Remove the holding clips by
pushing on the center of each
fastener head.
: Push to remove clip
: Push to reset/install clip

450

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３６：４０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４５６

Engine Compartment Covers
To remove the left engine
compartment cover:
1. Remove the battery cover (see
page 450 ).

RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CLIPS

LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CLIPS
CLIP

2. Remove the holding clips by
pushing on the center of each
fastener head.
To remove the right engine
compartment cover:
Maintenance

1. Remove the battery and front
bulkhead covers (see page 450 ).
2. Remove the holding clips by
pushing on the center of each
fastener head.
3. Take the windshield washer hose
out from the holder on the bottom
side of the cover.
When reinstalling the covers, make
sure the pins and tabs are in their
proper positions.

: Push to remove clip
: Push to reset/install clip

451

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３６：４７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４５７

Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Ambient Temperature
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Install the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

452

2010 RL

Acura Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Acura Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３６：５５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４５８

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the multiinformation display. The oil and filter
collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.

Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.

Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.

OIL DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.

1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.

453

2010 RL

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil, it
displays the API certification seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the maintenance
minder display.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３７：０５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４５９

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER

5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
6. Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )

3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the contacting surface
of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.
4. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.

7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.

454

2010 RL

Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３７：１２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４６０

Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant

RESERVE TANK

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.

If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.

Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.

Maintenance

If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.

CONTINUED

455

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３７：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４６１

Engine Coolant

LID

RADIATOR CAP

RESERVE TANK

1. Lift up the lid on the front
bulkhead cover from the front.

2. When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.

456

2010 RL

4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３７：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４６２

Engine Coolant
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.

7. Reinstall the lid.

Maintenance

457

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３７：３２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４６３

Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
If the washer fluid is low, a
‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.

Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.

DIPSTICK

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.

NOTICE: Do not use engine antif reeze
or a vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.

458

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３７：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４６４

Automatic Transmission Fluid
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.

UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK

4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.

Use only Acura ATF-Z1 (automatic
transmission f luid). Do not mix with
other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Acura ATF-Z1 may cause deterioration
in transmission operation and
durability, and could result in damage
to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Acura
ATF-Z1 is not covered by the Acura
new vehicle warranty.

The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown by a maintenance
message on the multi-information
display.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Maintenance

3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission as shown.

Always use Acura ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid).

6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.

459

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３７：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４６５

Brake Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Brake Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.

MAX

Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL

To check the fluid level, remove the
left engine compartment cover (see
page 451 ).
Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,
independent of mileage.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.

MIN

The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.

460

2010 RL

LOWER LEVEL

After removing the right engine
compartment cover (see page 451 ),
check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３７：５８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４６６

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.

Always use Acura Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Acura PSF as soon as possible.

Timing Belt
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown on the
maintenance minder. Replace the
belt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) if
you regularly drive your vehicle in
one or more of these conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
Maintenance

A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.

If you frequently tow a trailer.

461

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３８：０３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４６７

Lights
Headlight Aiming
Your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic headlight adjusting
system that adjusts the vertical angle
of the headlights automatically.
Refer to page 145 for more
information.

The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer (if applicable),
readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be done by your
dealer or another qualified
technician.

462

2010 RL

The low beam headlight bulbs are
high voltage discharge tube bulbs.
High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the light switch off
and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to
examine or change a low beam
headlight bulb yourself. If a low
beam headlight bulb fails, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
replaced.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３８：１１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４６８

Lights
Replacing a Headlight/Daytime
Running Light Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen high beam
headlight bulbs which are also used
for the daytime running light.
Handle it by its base and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.

1. Remove the left or right side
engine compartment cover from
the side you are working on by
carefully pulling the cover out (see
page 451 ).

BULB

If you are replacing the bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the
battery cover (see page 485 ).

CONNECTOR

3. Remove the bulb by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.

CONTINUED

463

2010 RL

Maintenance

2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３８：２１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４６９

Lights
4. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.

Replacing a Front Turn Signal
Light Bulb
1. Remove the left or right side
engine compartment cover from
the side you are working on by
carefully pulling the cover out (see
page 451 ).

BULB

SOCKET

6. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
7. Reinstall the engine compartment
side cover.
2. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

8. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the battery cover.

3. Push the bulb in slightly, and turn
it counterclockwise.

464

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３８：２９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４７０

Lights
4. Install the new bulb into the
socket.

7. Reinstall the engine compartment
side cover.

5. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.

8. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the battery cover.

Replacing a Front Parking/Side
Marker Bulb
1. Remove the left or right side
engine compartment cover (see
page 451 ).
2. (Passenger’s side)
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clip from the
windshield washer reservoir.

6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.

Maintenance

CONTINUED

465

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３８：４１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４７１

Lights
5. Install the new bulb into the
socket.

SOCKET

6. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.

BULB

7. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.

CLIP

3. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.

8. (Passenger’s side)
Reinstall the windshield washer
reservoir.
Reinstall the engine compartment
side cover.
9. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the battery cover.

466

2010 RL

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３８：４９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４７２

Lights
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.

BOLTS

BULB

6. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
7. Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.

CLIP

CONNECTOR

3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.

2. Carefully push up the side under
cover into the bumper.

4. Remove the bulb by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.

467

2010 RL

Maintenance

1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the two undercover bolts,
and remove the holding clip with a
flat-tip screwdriver.

8. Reinstall the two undercover bolts
on the side under cover and
tighten them securely. Put the
holding clip back on the side
undercover and push on the center
until it locks (the center is flush
with the head).

０９／０４／０２ １９：３８：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４７３

Lights
Replacing a Rear Turn Signal
Light Bulb

BULB
BOLTS

MOUNTING NUT
MAINTENANCE LID

1. Open the trunk lid, and remove
the left or right maintenance lid.
2. Remove the mounting nut with an
8 mm wrench.

TAIL LIGHT TRIM

3. Carefully pry in the top or bottom
edge of the trim with a small flattip screwdriver, and pull the trim
straight back.
4. Remove the two mounting bolts
with an 8 mm wrench.
5. Pull the taillight assembly straight
back out of the body.

468

2010 RL

SOCKET

6. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
7. Remove the burned out bulb by
pulling it straight out of its socket.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３９：０９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４７４

Lights
8. Install the new bulb in the socket
by pushing it straight in the socket
until it bottoms.

Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb
COVERS

BULB

9. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly. Turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
10.Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.

12.Tighten the mounting nut securely,
and reinstall the maintenance lid.

SOCKET

1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the light assembly cover
by pulling its outside edge.

3. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.

CONTINUED

469

2010 RL

Maintenance

11.When reinstalling the taillight
assembly, align and pop the snap
fasteners in place. Tighten the two
mounting bolts and reinstall the
trim in place.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３９：１７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４７５

Lights, Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts
5. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly. Turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
6. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
7. Reinstall the back-up light cover.

Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the climate control
system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the multiinformation display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the climate control system becomes
less than usual.

470

2010 RL

Cleaning the Seat Belts

LOOP

If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３９：２３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４７６

Floor Mats
If you use a non-Acura floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.

DRIVER’S SIDE FLOOR MAT

REAR PASSENGER’S FLOOR MAT
ANCHOR

Unlock

Lock

ANCHORS

Make sure the rear floor mats are
properly hooked to the floor mat
anchors. Your vehicle is equipped
with front passenger’s seat weight
sensors. If the rear passenger’s floor
mat is on the seat rail of the front
passenger’s seat, the sensors will
detect the decreased weight on the
seat, and they may not work properly.

If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.

471

2010 RL

Maintenance

The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over the floor mat
anchors. To lock each anchor, turn
the knob clockwise. This keeps the
floor mats from sliding forward
(possibly interfering with the pedals),
or backwards (making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective).

０９／０４／０２ １９：３９：３０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４７７

Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.

HOLDING LOCATIONS

WIPER ARMS

1. Adjust the windshield wiper arms
to the winter position by holding
both wiper arms as shown in the
illustration at the same time (see
page 139 ). Raise the wiper arms
off the windshield.

Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage
the hood and the wiper arms.

472

2010 RL

COVER

BLADE

SCREWS

2. Push the end of the cover on the
blade assembly until the other end
is pivoted out, and remove the
cover.
3. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by removing
the two screws from the arm.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３９：３７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４７８

Wiper Blades
BLADE

BLADE

6. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
7. Reinstall the blade assembly to the
wiper arm and tighten the two
screws securely. Reinstall the
cover by pushing it in.

REINFORCEMENT

5. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.

Maintenance

4. Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.

8. Set the wiper arms back on the
windshield. Adjust the windshield
wipers to their previously parked
position.

473

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：３９：４６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４７９

Wheels, Tires
Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.

Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.

Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.

The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.

Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.

474

2010 RL

Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) will warn you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 423 for
information on the TPMS.

０９／０４／０２ １９：３９：５３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４８０

Tires
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.

Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the vehicle
has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km).

While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.

You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.

Maintenance

Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose one to two psi (10
to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.

If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to
0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal; do not
release air to match the cold
pressure. The tires will be
underinflated.

Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page 476 .

475

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４０：０６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４８１

Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following charts show the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.

For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional technical information
about your tires, see page 520 .

High Speed Driving
Tire Size
P245/45R18 96V

Cold Tire Pressure
Front
36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5 kgf/cm )
Rear
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

Normal Driving
Tire Size/Type
P245/45R18 96V

Compact Spare
T155/70D17
110M

Cold Tire Pressure
Front
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Rear
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

High Speed Driving
U.S. model only

We strongly recommend that you do
not drive faster than the posted
speed limits and conditions allow. If
you ever drive in a sanctioned
competitive event at sustained high
speeds (over 112 mph or 181 km/h),
be sure to adjust the cold tire
pressures as shown below. If you do
not, excessive heat can build up and
cause sudden tire failure.

476

2010 RL

The recommended tire pressures for
high speed driving are not on the
label on the driver’s doorjamb,
contact your dealer for more
information about the tire pressures.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４０：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４８２

Tires
When you return to normal speed
driving, be sure to readjust the tire
pressure for normal driving. You
should wait until the tires are cold
before adjusting the tire pressure.

Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.

Excessive tread wear.

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.

477

2010 RL

Maintenance

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４０：１８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４８３

Tires
Tire Service Life
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.

478

2010 RL

The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 522 ).

０９／０４／０２ １９：４０：２８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４８４

Tires
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.

Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

Front

(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)

To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the multi-information display. Move
the tires to the positions shown in
the illustration each time they are
rotated. If you purchase directional
tires, rotate only front-to-back.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.

Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of each wheel.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to activate.

CONTINUED

479

2010 RL

Maintenance

Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.

Tire Rotation

０９／０４／０２ １９：４０：３５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４８５

Tires
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work on that tire.

Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel
that came on your vehicle.
Replacement wheels are available at
your Acura dealer.

480

2010 RL

Wheels and Tires
Wheels:
18 x 8.0J AL (TPMS)
Tires:
P245/45R18 96V
See page 520 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
522 for tire size explanation.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４０：４２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４８６

Tires
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Acura strongly
recommends using the chain listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).

Maintenance

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain
SC1042

CONTINUED

481

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４０：４６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４８７

Tires
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.

Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.

482

2010 RL

Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４０：５４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４８８

Checking the Battery
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.

The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.

CONTINUED

483

2010 RL

Maintenance

Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
To see the label, remove the battery
cover (see page 485 ).

If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.

If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４１：０１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４８９

Checking the Battery
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, all stored
driving positions will be lost. To
store the driving positions again, see
the storing procedure on page 163 .
On vehicles with navigation system

The navigation system will also
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.

On vehicles without navigation system

The compass system will also disable
itself. The next time you turn on the
ignition switch, the system will
require you to enter a PIN before it
can be used. Enter the four-digit antitheft security code (see page 298 ).
You will also need to reset the clock
according to the instruction of
setting the clock (see page 313 ).

484

2010 RL

If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system may disable itself. The next
time you turn on the radio you will
see ‘‘
’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset buttons to
enter the code (see page 280 ).
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the
power tilt and telescopic steering
wheel system will be disabled. The
system needs to be reset after
reconnecting the battery (see page
149 ).

０９／０４／０２ １９：４１：０９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４９０

Checking the Battery
3. To reinstall the cover, reinstall the
two holding clips and secure them
by pushing on the center of each
fastener head.

Removing the Battery Cover
CLIPS

Unlock
Lock

4. Turn the knob of the cover to
LOCK position as shown in the
illustration.

KNOB

Maintenance

1. Turn the knob of the battery cover
to UNLOCK as shown in the
illustration.

: Push to remove clip
: Push to reset/install clip

2. Remove the holding clips by
pushing on the center of each
fastener head.

485

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４１：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４９１

Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.

Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.

486

2010 RL

Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４１：２２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４９２

Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.

Compact Spare Tire....................... 488
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 489
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 493
Jump Starting ................................. 494
If the Engine Overheats ............... 497
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 500
Charging System Indicator........... 500
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 501
Brake System Indicator ................ 502
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ..................................... 503
Fuses ............................................... 504
Fuse Locations ............................... 510
Emergency Towing ....................... 513
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 513
Taking Care of the Unexpected

487

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４１：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４９３

Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the air pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:

Follow these precautions:

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
After the flat tire is replaced with
the spare tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator stays on.
After several miles (kilometers)
driving with the spare, this
indicator begins to flash, then
stays on again. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 427 ).

488

2010 RL

Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４１：３９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４９４

Changing a Flat Tire

The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
it.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.

TRUNK FLOOR

TOOL CASE

SPARE TIRE

JACK

3. Open the trunk, and fold the trunk
floor forward.

5. Unscrew the wing bolt, and
remove the spacer cone. Then
take the spare tire out of its well.

CONTINUED

489

2010 RL

Taking Care of the Unexpected

4. Take the tool case out of the spare
tire.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４１：４６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４９５

Changing a Flat Tire
WHEEL NUT WRENCH

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

6. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.

EXTENSION

7. Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. It is pointed to by a △
mark molded into the underside of
the body. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

490

2010 RL

8. Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
9. Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Temporarily
place the flat tire on the ground
with the outside surface of the
wheel facing up. You could scratch
the wheel if you put it face down.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４１：５４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４９６

Changing a Flat Tire

BRAKE HUB

11.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.

12.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.

CONTINUED

491

2010 RL

Taking Care of the Unexpected

10.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４２：０２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４９７

Changing a Flat Tire
SPACER CONE

16. Store the jack and tools in the tool
case. Place the tool case in the flat
tire.

Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.

WING BOLT

13.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)

14.Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
15.Wrap the spacer cone and spare
tire wing bolt with cloth or paper,
and store them in the spare tire
well.

492

2010 RL

17.Lower the trunk floor, then close
the trunk lid.
18.Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
page 424 ).

０９／０４／０２ １９：４２：１０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４９８

If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.

Make sure the remote is with you,
inside the vehicle.
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 494 .

Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 513 .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page 483 ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page 494 ).

493

2010 RL

Taking Care of the Unexpected

You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.

Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:

０９／０４／０２ １９：４２：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０４９９

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 397 .

There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 506 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 513 .

Are you using a properly coded
built-in key or remote? An
improperly coded built-in key or
remote will cause the immobilizer
system indicator in the instrument
panel to blink rapidly (see page
64 ).

Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.

A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.

494

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４２：２９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５００

Jump Starting
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.

BOOSTER BATTERY

3. Remove the battery cover (see
page 485 ), then remove the
secondary under-hood fuse box
cover from the positive (＋)
terminal on the battery.

The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
4. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (＋) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive (＋)
terminal on the booster battery.

CONTINUED

495

2010 RL

Taking Care of the Unexpected

2. Turn off all the electrical accessories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake.

COVER

０９／０４／０２ １９：４２：３７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５０１

Jump Starting
7. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.

Connecting the jumper cable to the
secondary under-hood f use box causes
the f uses to blow.

8. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
5. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding point
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
6. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

496

2010 RL

9. Reinstall the secondary underhood fuse box cover over the
positive (＋) terminal of the
battery, then reinstall the battery
cover.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４２：４５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５０２

If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.

Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
the accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood,
turn off the engine. Wait until
you see no more signs of steam
or spray, then open the hood.

4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 513 ).

CONTINUED

497

2010 RL

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.

Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.

3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４２：５３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５０３

If the Engine Overheats
6. If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.

Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.

8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
9. Start the engine, and set the
interior temperature to maximum
(climate control to FULL AUTO at
‘‘
’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.

Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.

498

2010 RL

10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 513 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４２：５８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５０４

If the Engine Overheats
Check Radiator System

You can still drive your vehicle even
if this message appears on the multiinformation display, however you
should check the temperature gauge
while driving.
If you notice the temperature gauge
climbing to or above the red mark,
safely pull to the side of the road.
Follow the instructions on pages
497 and 498 .

Taking Care of the Unexpected

If there is a problem with the
radiator system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK RADIATOR SYSTEM’’ on
the multi-information display.
If you see this message, the engine
has probably overheated. You should
take your vehicle to a dealer, and
have it repaired as soon as possible.

499

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４３：０７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５０５

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, or if you
see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL
LEVEL’’ message on the multiinformation display, the oil pressure
has dropped very low or lost
pressure. Serious engine damage is
possible, and you should take
immediate action.

1. Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.

Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.

4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
513 ).

2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 383 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 452 ).

500

2010 RL

Charging System
Indicator
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display, the
battery is not being charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a dealer or a service station
where you can get technical
assistance.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４３：１５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５０６

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on
while driving, or if you see
a ‘‘CHECK EMISSION
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, it means one of
the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.

If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Readiness Code
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes may be erased. It can
take several days of driving under
various conditions to set the codes
again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 529 ).

501

2010 RL

Taking Care of the Unexpected

If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message on
the multi-information display.
Tighten the cap until it clicks at least
once (see page 381 ). Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may go off as you
continue driving, have the vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４３：２１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５０７

Brake System Indicator
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position and as a reminder to
check the parking brake. If you do
not release the parking brake, the
indicator will stay on, and you will
see a ‘‘RELEASE PARKING
BRAKE’’ message on the multiinformation display.
U.S.

Canada

If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. You will see a
‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message on
the multi-information display. Press
lightly on the brake pedal to see if it
feels normal. If it does, check the
brake fluid level the next time you
stop at a service station (see page
460 ).

If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display.

502

2010 RL

Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 513 ).

０９／０４／０２ １９：４３：２７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５０８

Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.

Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually

If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.

MAINTENANCE LID

To open the fuel fill door, pull the
release lever rearward.

503

2010 RL

Taking Care of the Unexpected

If the fuel fill door release button
does not work, use the release lever
inside the left maintenance lid in the
trunk.

RELEASE LEVER

０９／０４／０２ １９：４３：３４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５０９

Fuses
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side

NOTCH

INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passenger’s side

NOTCH

The fuses are located in five fuse
boxes. The interior fuse boxes are
located under the dashboard on the
driver’s and passenger’s side.

SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side

FUSE BOX

To open the secondary fuse box lid,
push the tab in the direction as
shown in the illustration.

To remove the fuse box lid, put your
finger in the notch on the lid, pull it
toward you, and take it out of its
hinges.

504

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４３：４１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５１０

Fuses
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
TAB

TAB

The secondary under-hood fuse box
is on the battery. To open it, push
the tabs as shown.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

The primary under-hood fuse box is
in the engine compartment on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.

To check the fuse box, remove the
battery cover first (see page 485 ).

505

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４３：４８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５１１

Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
510 , 511 , and 512 , or the diagram
on the fuse box lid, which fuse or
fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown
fuses, and check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.

FUSE

BLOWN

3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.

506

2010 RL

BLOWN

０９／０４／０２ １９：４３：５４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５１２

Fuses
FUSE

FUSE PULLER

BLOWN

5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.

CONTINUED

507

2010 RL

Taking Care of the Unexpected

4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller. The fuse puller is inside the
primary under-hood fuse box.

BLOWN

０９／０４／０２ １９：４３：５９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５１３

Fuses
SPARE FUSES

FUSE PULLER

If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits with
the fuse puller provided in the underhood fuse box. Make sure you can
do without that circuit temporarily
(such as the accessory power socket
or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.

Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.

508

2010 RL

6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４４：０６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５１４

Fuses
If the fuse for the driving position
memory system is removed, all
stored driving positions will be lost.
To store the driving positions again,
see page 163 .
On vehicles with navigation system

If the navigation system fuse is
removed, the navigation system will
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.

page 313 ).
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the audio
system you will see ‘‘
’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code
(see page 280 ).
If the fuse for the power tilt
telescopic steering is removed, the
system will be disabled. The system
needs to be reset after reinstalling
the fuse (see page 149 ).
Taking Care of the Unexpected

On vehicles without navigation system

If the compass system fuse is
removed, the compass system will
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Enter the fourdigit anti-theft security code (see
page 298 ). You will also need to
reset the clock according to the
setting the clock instructions (see

509

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４４：１５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５１５

Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

15 A
30 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
30 A
30 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
40 A

No. Amps.
1

50 A

Circuits Protected
Left headlight low beam
Rear defroster coil
Left headlight high beam
Small light
Right headlight high beam
Right headlight low beam
Back-up
FI ECU
Wiper
Headlight washer＊
Fog lights
MG clutch
Horn, Stop
Rear defroster

Circuits Protected
Radiator fan

510

2010 RL

No. Amps.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

40 A
15 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
(40 A)
40 A
70 A
120 A
50 A
50 A

Circuits Protected
Back-up, ACC
Hazard
ABS/VSA motor
ABS/VSA
Drive by wire, LAF heater
Option
Heater motor
Passenger’s fuse box
Battery
IG main
Power window

＊: On Canadian models

０９／０４／０２ １９：４４：２３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５１６

Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side

SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s side

No. Amps.
15 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A

11
12
13
14
15
16

15 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
20 A

No. Amps.
1
2

7.5 A
7.5 A

Drive by Wire
Ignition coil
Daytime running light
LAF heater
Radio
Interior light
Back-up
Door lock
Accessory socket
Occupant position detection
system
Wiper
Rear heated seat
Passenger’s power seat reclining
Driver’s power seat sliding
Tire pressure monitoring system
Driver’s power seat reclining

No. Amps.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

20 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
20 A
7.5 A

30
31
32
33

7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
(7.5 A)

Circuits Protected
Passenger’s power seat sliding
ACG
Fuel Pump
IGN SOL
Meter
SRS
IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
Left rear power window
ETS (telescopic)
ETS (tilt)
Driver’s power window
Moonroof
Adaptive Front Lighting
System
Air Conditioner
e-pretensioner
ACC
Option

Taking Care of the Unexpected

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected
Starter diag.
Starter signal

511

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４４：２９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５１７

Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passenger’s side

No. Amps.
1
2
3
4

30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A

20 A

Circuits Protected
SH-AWD
Premium amplifier
Passenger’s power window
Driver’s automatic seat belt
tensioner/e-pretensioner
Right rear power window

512

2010 RL

No. Amps.
6
7

20 A
7.5 A

30 A

7.5 A

Circuits Protected
Heated seats
Illumination lights
Passenger’s automatic seat
belt tensioner/
e-pretensioner
Air conditioner

０９／０４／０２ １９：４４：３８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５１８

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see the previous
column).

COVER

For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchor in the front bumper.

Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the
all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle
should be transported on a f lat-bed
truck or trailer.

CONTINUED

513

2010 RL

Taking Care of the Unexpected

To use the towing hook:
1. Remove the cover from the front
bumper by pushing the right
corner edge of the cover with a
finger until the cover comes out as
shown in the illustration.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４４：４３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５１９

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WHEEL NUT WRENCH

COVER

To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.

TETHER

The cover is attached to the bumper
with a tether.

2. Remove the towing hook and
wheel nut wrench from the tool
case in the spare tire.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.

514

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４４：４７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５２０

Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle, and the location of
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.

Identification Numbers ................. 516
Specifications ................................. 518
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 520
Treadwear .................................. 520
Traction....................................... 520
Temperature .............................. 521
Tire Labeling .................................. 522
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) − Required Federal
Explanation............................. 524

515

2010 RL

Technical Information

Emissions Controls........................ 526
The Clean Air Act ...................... 526
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 526
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 526
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 526
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 527
PGM-FI System ..................... 527
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 527
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 527
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 527
Replacement Parts..................... 527
Three Way Catalytic
Converters .................................. 528
Emissions Testing ......................... 529

０９／０４／０２ １９：４４：５２ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５２１

Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL

U.S. vehicle is shown.

516

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４４：５６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５２２

Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front
left, below the valve cover.

ENGINE NUMBER

The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.

Technical Information

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

517

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４５：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５２３

Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track

Front
Rear

Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating

Seating Capacities
Total
Front
Rear
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type

Capacities
Fuel tank

195.8 in (4,973 mm)
72.7 in (1,847 mm)
57.3 in (1,455 mm)
110.2 in (2,800 mm)
62.0 in (1,575 mm)
62.4 in (1,585 mm)

See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.

5
2
3

HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.8−17.60 oz (450−500 g)
ND-OIL8

Change＊1
Total
Change＊2
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Automatic
Change
transmission Total
fluid
Rear differential fluid
SH-AWD
Change
differential Total
case
SH-AWD
Change
clutch case Total
Transfer
Change
assembly
Total
fluid
Windshield
U.S. vehicles
washer
Canadian
reservoir
vehicles
Engine
coolant
Engine oil

Approx.
19.4 US gal (73 )
1.59 US gal (6.0 )
2.27 US gal (8.6 )
4.5 US qt (4.3
4.2 US qt (4.0
5.3 US qt (5.0
3.0 US qt (2.8
8.1 US qt (7.7

)
)
)
)
)

0.77 US qt (0.73 )
0.79 US qt (0.75 )
2.8 US qt (2.7 )
3.3 US qt (3.1 )
0.45 US qt (0.43 )
0.48 US qt (0.45 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
6.9 US qt (6.5 )

＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.58 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

518

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４５：３８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５２４

Specifications
Lights
Headlights＊ (High Beam)
Front turn signal
Front side marker/Parking lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up light
Fog lights
License plate lights
Ceiling lights
Front
Rear
Vanity mirror lights
Door courtesy lights
Trunk lights
inside trunk
trunk lid

12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V

−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs

60 W (HB3)
24/2.2 CP (Amber)
1.5 CP
21 W (Amber)
21 W
35 W (H8)
5W
8W
8W
2W
2 CP
5W
5W

Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
Caster

＊ : Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge
tube (D2S).
Battery
Capacity

Under-hood

Pressure
12 V − 55 AH/5 HR
12 V − 72 AH/20 HR

Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare

0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
−0°8’
−1°15’
2°10’

P245/45R18 96V
T155/70D17 110M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

See page 511 and 512 or the fuse
label attached to the inside of
each fuse box cover.
See page 510 or the fuse box
cover.

519

2010 RL

Technical Information

Fuses
Interior

Tires
Size

Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front

SOHC VTEC V-6 gasoline engine
3.54 x 3.78 in (90 x 96 mm)
223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm )
11.2 : 1
ILZKR7B-11S
NGK:
DENSO: SXU22HCR11S

０９／０４／０２ １９：４５：４６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５２５

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.

All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.

520

2010 RL

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４５：５０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５２６

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

Technical Information

Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.

521

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４６：０４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５２７

Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

Tire Size

Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.

(1)

96 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
V

− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).

P245/45R18 96V
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).

245 − Tire width in millimeters.

The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.

45 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
(1)

(4)

(3)

(2)

(1) Tire Size
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure
(4) Maximum Tire Load

DOT B97R FW6X 2202
DOT

− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).

18 − Rim diameter in inches.

− This indicates that the
tire meets all
requirements of the U.S.
Department of
Transportation.

B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.

522

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４６：１３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５２８

Tire Labeling
FW6X − Tire type code.
2202

− Date of manufacture.
Year
Week

Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure − The tire air
pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

principal grooves designed to give a
visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread.

Load Rating − Means the maximum
load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure − The
maximum tire air pressure that the
tire can hold.

Technical Information

Maximum Load Rating − Means the
load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure −
The cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) −
Means the projections within the

523

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４６：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５２９

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.

As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale

(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)

when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.

Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.

Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.

524

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４６：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５３０

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.

Technical Information

When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.

525

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４６：３１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５３１

Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.

The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act＊
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on pages
439 and 446 .
＊

In Canada, Acura vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive

526

2010 RL

crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４６：４１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５３２

Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.

Ignition Timing Control System

This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic converters
are in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, they convert HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
Technical Information

PGM-FI System

The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.

Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work
together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Acura replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.

527

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４６：４７ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５３３

Three Way Catalytic Converters
The three way catalytic converters
contain precious metals that serve as
catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converters are referred
to as three-way catalysts, since they
act on HC, CO, and NOx.
Replacement units must be original
Acura parts or their equivalent.
The three way catalytic converters
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. They can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near them. Park your vehicle away
from high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.

A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converters.

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converters
ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.

528

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４６：５５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５３４

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.

If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).

4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
6. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.

2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.

CONTINUED

529

2010 RL

Technical Information

3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：００ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５３５

Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
for at least 20 minutes. Drive on
the highway in D. Do not use the
cruise control. When traffic allows,
drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal.
(Vehicle speed may vary slightly;
this is okay.) If you cannot do this
for a continuous 90 seconds
because of traffic conditions, drive
for at least 30 seconds, then repeat
it two more times (for a total of 90
seconds).

8. Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
9. Stop the vehicle, turn off the
ignition switch, and leave it off for
30 minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.

530

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：０３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５３６

Warranty and Client Relations
Client Service Information ........... 532
Warranty Coverages ..................... 533
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 534
Authorized Manuals ...................... 535
Warranty and Client Relations

531

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：１０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５３７

Client Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact Acura Client
Services.

U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Canadian Owners:

When you call or write, please give
us this information:

Acura Client Services
Honda Canada Inc.
Visit www.acura.ca for contact
information
Tel: 1-866-78-ACURA
Fax: (877) 939-0909

532

2010 RL

Vehicle identification number
(see page 516 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：２１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５３８

Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:

Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two

warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up

to 100% credit toward a replacement
battery.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −

Acura accessories are covered under
this warranty. Time and mileage
limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty manual for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Acura

replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.

Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated

coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides

coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2010 Acura Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2010 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.

533

2010 RL

Warranty and Client Relations

New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：２４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５３９

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

534

2010 RL

To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：３３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５４０

Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61SJA05
61SJA05EL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.

Form Description
2005-2010 Acura RL Service Manual
2005-2010 Acura RL
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2005 Model Series Acura RL Body Repair Manual
2009 Acura RL Body Repair Manual Supplement
2010 Acura RL Owner’s Manual
2010 Acura RL Navigation System Manual
2010 Acura RL Maintenance Journal
2010 Acura RL Advanced Technology Guide
Order Form for Previous Years
Indicate Year and Model Desired

Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.

535

2010 RL

Authorized Manuals

61SJA30
61SJA31
31SJA650
31SJA830
31SJAM50
31SJAQ50
ACU-R

Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：３６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５４１

536

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：４１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５４２

Index
A

B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 62, 500
Jump Starting ............................. 494
Maintenance ............................... 483
Cover ........................................... 485
Specifications ............................. 519
Before Driving ............................... 377

Belts, Seat ................................... 10, 21
Beverage Holders .......................... 194
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ......... 354
Booster Seats ................................... 53
Brakes
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) ...................................... 411
Break-in, New Linings .............. 378
Fluid ............................................ 460
Parking ........................................ 191
System Indicator .................. 63, 502
Wear Indicators ......................... 410
Braking System.............................. 410
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 378
Brightness Control,
Instruments ................................ 146
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 469
Fog Lights .................................. 466
Front Parking Lights ................. 465
Front Side Marker Lights......... 465
Headlights .................................. 463
Specifications ............................. 519
Turn Signal Lights ............. 464, 468
CONTINUED

2010 RL

INDEX

Accessories..................................... 387
ACCESSORY (Ignition Switch
Position) ...................................... 152
Accessory Power Sockets............. 197
AcuraLink ..................................... 337
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Indicator ...................................... 319
Operation .................................... 321
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS) ........................................... 144
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 452
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 11, 26
Air Conditioning............................. 204
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 476
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 379
Antifreeze ....................................... 455
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 64, 411
Operation .................................... 411
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 280
Anti-theft Steering Column
Lock ............................................. 152
Audio System ................................. 213

Auto Control Mode, Starting
Engine ......................................... 397
Automatic Climate Control........... 211
Automatic Lighting........................ 141
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 23
Automatic Speed Control.............. 316
Automatic Transmission............... 399
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 518
Checking Fluid Level ................ 458
Shifting ........................................ 399
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 399
Shift Lever Positions ................. 400
Shift Lock Release ..................... 401
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 277

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：４６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５４３

Index
Built-in-key ...................................... 167
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 463

C
Capacities Chart............................. 518
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 389
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
CD Care .......................................... 274
CD Error Message ........................ 271
CD Changer.................................... 236
Ceiling Lights ................................. 200
Certification Label ......................... 516
Chains, Tires .................................. 481
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 489
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 453
When to....................................... 439
Charging System Indicator........... 500
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 396
Child Safety ...................................... 38
Booster Seats ............................... 53
Child Seats .................................... 45
Important Safety Reminders ...... 38
Infants ........................................... 43

Larger Children ........................... 52
LATCH.......................................... 47
Risks with Airbags....................... 39
Small Children.............................. 44
Tethers.......................................... 51
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 39
Child Seats ........................................ 43
LATCH.......................................... 47
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51
Childproof Door Locks ................. 155
Cleaning
Seat Belts .................................... 470
Client Service Office ..................... 532
Climate Control System ................ 204
Clock, Setting the .......................... 313
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 526
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 397
Collision Mitigation Brake System
(CMBS)
Indicator ...................................... 418
Operation .................................... 413
Compact Spare Tire....................... 488
Compass System ............................ 281
Console Compartment .................. 195
Consumer Information.................. 532
Controls, Instruments and .............. 59

2010 RL

Coolant
Adding ......................................... 455
Checking ..................................... 383
Proper Solution .......................... 455
Temperature Gauge .................... 70
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 526
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 65
Cruise Control Operation ............. 316
Cup Holders.................................... 194
Customize Settings .......................... 81
ACC Setup .................................... 89
Door/Window Setup ................. 122
KEYLESS ACCESS Setup ........ 108
Lighting Setup............................ 115
Meter Setup .................................. 94
Position Setup ............................ 103
Setting to Default ......................... 85
Wiper Setup ................................ 133

D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 4, 60
Daytime Running Lights............... 142
Indicator ........................................ 65

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：５１ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５４４

Index
E
Economy, Fuel ............................... 384
Emergencies................................... 487
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 494
Brake System Indicator ............ 502
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 489
Charging System Indicator ...... 500
Checking the Fuses................... 506
Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 146
Jump Starting ............................. 494
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 500
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 501
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ................................. 503
Overheated Engine ................... 497
Towing ........................................ 513
Emergency Brake .......................... 191
Emergency Flashers ..................... 146
Emergency Towing ....................... 513
Emergency Trunk Opener ........... 155
Emissions Controls........................ 526
Emissions Testing ......................... 529
Engine
Check Starting System ............. 398
Compartment Covers ................ 450

Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 70
If It Won’t Start .......................... 493
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 62, 501
Oil life .......................................... 439
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 62, 500
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 452
Overheating................................ 497
Specifications ............................. 519
Speed Limiter ............................. 401
Starting........................................ 397
Engine Speed Limiter.................... 401
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 379
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 526
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 56
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
System......................................... 527
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 19

F
Fan, Interior.................................... 206
Features .......................................... 203
CONTINUED

III

2010 RL

INDEX

Dead Battery .................................. 493
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 534
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 147
Defrosting the Windows ............... 210
Differential Fluid ........................... 518
Dimensions ..................................... 518
Dimming the Headlights .............. 140
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 458
Engine Oil ................................... 383
Directional Signals......................... 140
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 410
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 454
Doors
Locking and Unlocking ............. 153
Lockout Prevention ................... 153
Monitor Indicator .................. 13, 79
Power Door Locks ..................... 153
DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ......... 520
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7
Driver’s ID ........................................ 81
Driving ............................................ 395
Economy ..................................... 384
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 163
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 470

０９／０４／０２ １９：４７：５６ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５４５

Index
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 379
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................... 470
Oil ................................................ 453
Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 146
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 489
Floor Mats ...................................... 471
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 458
Brake ........................................... 460
Power Steering........................... 460
Windshield Washer ................... 458
Fog Lights ...................................... 142
Four-way Flashers ......................... 146
Front Airbags ............................. 11, 29
Front Seat ....................................... 156
Adjusting..................................... 156
Heaters........................................ 181
Airbags .................................... 11, 29
Air Ventilation ............................ 182
Fuel .................................................. 378
Fill Door and Cap....................... 379
Gauge ............................................ 70
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 66
Octane Requirement ................. 378

Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ................................. 503
Oxygenated ................................ 379
Tank, Refueling ......................... 379
Tighten Fuel Cap ....................... 380
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 506

G
Gas Mileage Improving................. 385
Gasoline .......................................... 378
Gauge ............................................ 70
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 66
Octane Requirement ................. 378
Tank, Refueling ......................... 379
Gas Station Procedures................. 379
Gauges .............................................. 70
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 70
Fuel ................................................ 70
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 432
Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 399
Glove Box ....................................... 193
GPS initialization ............................ 299
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 432

2010 RL

H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 463
HandsFreeLink , Bluetooth ........ 354
Hazard Warning Flashers............. 146
Headlights
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS)....................................... 144
Aiming ......................................... 462
Automatic Lighting ................... 141
Daytime Running Lights .......... 142
High Beam Indicator ................... 65
Lights On Indicator ..................... 64
Low Beams, Turning on ........... 140
Reminder Chime........................ 140
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 463
High beams, Turning on ........... 140
Washer＊＊ .................................... 138
Head Restraints ............................. 157
Heated Mirror ................................ 162
Heater, Seat .................................... 181
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 397
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 334
Hood, Opening the ........................ 381
Horn ............................................ 5, 136

０９／０４／０２ １９：４８：０３ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５４６

Index
I

Interface Dial ................. 205, 213, 337
Interior Lights ................................ 200
Introduction ......................................... i

J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 490
Jack, Tire ........................................ 489
Jump Starting ................................. 494

K
Keys ................................................. 150
Keyless Access System................. 166
Keyless Access Remote ................ 167
Keyless Memory Settings ............ 173

L
Label, Certification ........................ 516
Lane Change, Signaling ................ 140
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................... 22
Lights On Indicator ......................... 64
CONTINUED

2010 RL

INDEX

Identification Number, Vehicle.... 516
Ignition
Keys............................................. 150
Switch .......................................... 152
Timing Control System ............. 527
Immobilizer System....................... 151
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8
Indicators .......................................... 62
ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) ............................. 64, 411
Adaptive Front lighting
System (AFS) ................... 69, 144
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 63, 502
Charging System ................. 62, 500
Collision Mitigation Brake
System (CMBS)............... 69, 418
Cruise Control .............................. 66
Electronically Controlled Power
Steering System (ECPS)......... 68
Fog Light ...................................... 65
High Beam.................................... 65
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 64
Keyless Access System ...... 68, 179

Lights On ...................................... 64
Low Fuel ....................................... 66
Low Oil Pressure ................. 62, 500
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator............................ 67, 423
Malfunction (MIL) .............. 62, 501
Message ........................................ 68
Seat Belt Reminder ............... 21, 62
Security System ................... 69, 315
SH-AWD ....................................... 66
Side Airbag Off ............................ 63
SRS ................................................ 63
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 64
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) ... 65
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)
Activation.......................... 65, 429
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 61
Infant Restraint ................................ 43
Infant Seats ....................................... 43
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 51
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 474
Inside Mirror .................................. 161
Inspection, Tire .............................. 477
Instrument Panel ............................. 61
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 146

０９／０４／０２ １９：４８：０８ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５４７

Index
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 463
Indicator ........................................ 61
Position ....................................... 140
Turn Signal ................................. 140
Load Limit ...................................... 431
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 152
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 152
Childproof Door ......................... 155
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 379
Glove Box ................................... 193
Power Door ................................ 153
Trunk .......................................... 154
Trunk Pass-through Cover ....... 160
Low Coolant Level ......................... 383
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 66
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 62, 500
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 518
Luggage, Storing ........................... 389

Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 446
Safety........................................... 438
Sub Items .................................... 448
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 501
Memory, Driving Position ............ 163
Message Display .............................. 78
Message Indicator ........................... 68
Meters, Gauges ................................ 70
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 379
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 161
Modifications.................................. 387
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 388
Moonroof ................................. 187-190
MP3 ................................................. 243
Multi-Information Display .............. 71

N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 400
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 378
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 516

Maintenance ................................... 437
Main Items ................................. 447
Minder......................................... 439

O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 378
Odometer .......................................... 72
Odometer, Trip ................................ 72
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 453
Change, When to ....................... 439
Checking Engine ....................... 383
Life, Engine ................................ 439
Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 500
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 452
ON (Ignition Switch Position) ...... 152
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 526
Outside Mirrors ............................. 161
Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 73
Overheating, Engine ..................... 497
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 446
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 379

P
Paddle Shifters ............................... 403
Panel Brightness Control ............. 146

2010 RL

０９／０４／０２ １９：４８：１４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５４８

Index
Park Gear Position......................... 400
Parking ............................................ 409
Parking Brake ................................ 191
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 63, 502
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 409
PGM-FI System.............................. 527
Power Door Locks ......................... 153
Power Socket Locations................ 197
Power Windows ............................. 185
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 19
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13
Additional Safety Precautions .... 20
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 19
Protecting Children ......................... 38
Protecting Infants ........................ 43
Protecting Larger Children ........ 52
Protecting Small Children .......... 44
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 51
Using LATCH .............................. 47

Radiator Overheating .................... 497
Radio/CD Sound System .............. 213

S
Safety Belts................................. 10, 21
Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 534
Safety Features .................................. 9
Airbags .......................................... 11
Seat Belts ...................................... 10
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 57
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Satellite Digital Radio＊ .................. 229
Seat Belts .................................... 10, 21
Additional Information ................ 21
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 23
Cleaning ...................................... 470
e-pretensioner .............................. 24
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 17, 22
Maintenance ................................. 25
Reminder Indicator and
Beeper ................................. 21, 62
System Components.................... 21
Use During Pregnancy................ 19
Seat Heaters ................................... 181
Seat Position Memory ................... 163
CONTINUED

VII

2010 RL

INDEX

Readiness Codes ............................ 501
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 468
Rear View Mirror........................... 161
Rear Window Defogger ................ 147
Reclining the Seat Backs .............. 156
Reminder Indicators ........................ 62
Remote ............................................ 166
Replacement Information
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 453
Fuses ........................................... 504
Light Bulbs ................................. 462
Schedule ..................................... 439
Tires ............................................ 474
Wiper Blades .............................. 472
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 25
Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 383
Restraint, Child ................................ 38
Reverse Gear Position................... 400
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror ............. 162
Rearview Camera........................... 375
Roof Rack ....................................... 392
Rotation, Tire ................................. 479

０９／０４／０２ １９：４８：１９ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５４９

Index
Seat Ventilation＊＊ .......................... 182
Seats, Adjusting the ....................... 156
Security System ............................. 315
Sequential Sports Shift Mode ...... 405
Paddle Shifters ........................... 403
Serial Number ................................ 516
Service Intervals ............................ 439
Service Manual, Purchasing＊....... 535
Service Station Procedures .......... 379
Super Handling-All Wheel DriveTM
(SH-AWD ) ............................ 407
Torque Distribution Monitor ... 407
Indicator ........................................ 66
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 399
Shift Lock Release ......................... 401
Side Airbags ............................... 11, 32
How the Side Airbag off
Indicator Works ....................... 35
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 32
Side Curtain Airbags ................. 11, 34
How Your Side Curtain
Airbags Work ........................... 34
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement in .......................... 465
Signaling Turns .............................. 140
Snow Tires ...................................... 481

Sound System ................................. 213
Spare Tire
Inflating ....................................... 488
Specifications ............................. 519
Specification Charts ...................... 518
Speed Limiter ................................. 401
Spotlights ........................................ 200
SRS, Additional Information........... 26
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 34
How Your Airbags
Work ............................. 29, 32, 34
SRS Components ......................... 26
SRS Service................................... 36
SRS Indicator.............................. 34, 63
START (Ignition Switch
Position) ...................................... 152
Starting the Engine........................ 397
Auto Control Mode.................... 397
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 397
With a Dead Battery ................. 494
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 497
Steering Wheel
Adjustments ............................... 148
Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 152

VIII

2010 RL

Position Memory ....................... 163
Steering Wheel Buttons/
Switches ...................................... 136
Stereo Sound System .................... 213
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 486
Sun Visors ....................................... 196
Supplemental Restraint
System................................. 11, 26
Servicing ....................................... 36
SRS Indicator.......................... 34, 63
System Components.................... 26
Synthetic Oil ................................... 453
T
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 487
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 520
Emissions Control Systems ...... 526
Three Way Catalytic
Converters .............................. 528
Temperature Gauge ........................ 70
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 212
Temperature, Outside ..................... 73
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 51

０９／０４／０２ １９：４８：２５ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５５０

Index
Rotating....................................... 479
Snow ............................................ 481
Specifications ............................. 519
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 489
Torque Distribution Monitor
(SH-AWD) .................................. 407
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 431
Equipment and Accessories ..... 432
Weight Limit .............................. 431
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) ................................... 423
Required Federal
Explanation............................. 524
Warning Message...................... 427
Trailer Loading .............................. 431
Trailer Towing Tips....................... 435
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ............................... 458
Fluid Selection............................ 459
Identification Number............... 517
Shifting the Automatic .............. 399
Treadwear .............................. 477, 488
Trip Meter ........................................ 72

Trunk............................................... 154
Emergency Opener ................... 155
Opening the ................................ 154
Open Monitor Indicator ........ 13, 79
Turn Signals ................................... 140

U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 487
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 520
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 378
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 454

V
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 390
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 518
Vehicle Identification Number..... 516
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System..................................... 429
VSA Activation Indicator .... 65, 429
VSA Off Switch .......................... 430
VSA System Indicator ......... 65, 429
CONTINUED

2010 RL

INDEX

Three Way Catalytic
Converters .................................. 528
Tilt/Telescopic Steering
Wheel .......................................... 148
Timing Belt ..................................... 461
Tire Chains ..................................... 481
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 489
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ............. 423, 524
Monitoring Tire Pressure
Reading ................................... 423
TPMS System Warning ............ 423
Tires ................................................ 474
Air Pressure ............................... 476
Chains ......................................... 481
Checking Wear .......................... 477
Compact Spare ........................... 488
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 520
Inflation ....................................... 474
Inspection ................................... 477
Labeling ...................................... 522
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator............................ 67, 423
Pressure Monitor....................... 425
Pressure Monitor System ......... 423
Replacing .................................... 479

０９／０４／０３ １０：１２：２０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５５１

Index
Vehicle Storage .............................. 486
VIN .................................................. 516
Viscosity, Oil................................... 452
Voice Control System.................... 304

W
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 57
Warranty Coverages ..................... 533
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 458
Operation .................................... 137
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering .............. 148
Alignment and Balance ............. 479
Compact Spare ........................... 488
Nut Wrench ................................ 490
Windows
Auto Reverse .............................. 186
Operating the Power ................. 185
Rear, Defogger .......................... 147
Windshield
Cleaning ...................................... 137
Defroster .................................... 207
Washers ...................................... 137

Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 472
Operation .................................... 137
Summer/Winter Position ......... 139
WMA ............................................... 243
Worn Tires ..................................... 477
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 513

X
XM Radio ...................................... 229
＊＊

Canada only

2010 RL

０９／０４／０３ １０：１２：４４ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０５５３

Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
19.4 US gal (73 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 452 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Acura ATF-Z1 (automatic
transmission fluid) (see page 459 ).

Rear Differential Fluid:
Use Acura ATF-Z1 (automatic
transmission fluid) only.
Capacity:
SH-AWD differential case
0.77 US qt (0.73 )
SH-AWD clutch case
2.8 US qt (2.7 )
Transfer Assembly Fluid:
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
hypoid gear oil, API service
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Power Steering Fluid:
Acura Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 461 ).

2010 RL

Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 460 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Spare Tire Pressure:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０９／０４／０２ １８：３６：５０ ３１ＳＪＡ６５０ ０００１

Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be
considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the
vehicle when it is sold.

OWNER

ADDRESS
STREET

CITY

STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY

ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE

This owner’s manual covers all
models of the Acura RL. You may
find descriptions of equipment and
features that are not on your
particular model.

V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME

DEALER NO.

ADDRESS
STREET

CITY

STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY

ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE

OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE

2010 RL

The information and specifications
included in this publication were in
effect at the time of approval for
printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice
and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Create Date                     : 2009:04:03 09:47:38Z
Modify Date                     : 2009:07:29 14:41:49-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:07:29 14:41:49-07:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Macintosh
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2010 RL Owner's Manual (Linked)
Creator                         : American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Document ID                     : uuid:1825ac9c-f671-4f6c-9e15-6e57f37d0fde
Instance ID                     : uuid:5b002c7a-8fd8-4b2b-98ee-0de719c37345
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 551
Author                          : American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Acura 2010 Rl Users Manual Owner's (Linked)

Acura-2010-Rl-Owners-Manual-761947 acura-2010-rl-owners-manual-761947

Manual JA1010OM 2010 Acura RL Owners Manual | Manual Device

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation